JP2023137565A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which does not cause a player to feel discomfort by display in an unnatural mode of decoration identification information and reservation display.SOLUTION: A decorative symbol variation start action is performed when reservation shift display is performed, scroll display of a decorative symbol is not started until shift display switching first reservation display in a special symbol reservation storage display area to active display 3 in an active display area is over, and common shift display can be performed when variable display is performed on the basis of a variation pattern designation command of a first kind and when variable display is performed on the basis of a variation pattern designation command of a second kind. In a pre-notification scene, a notification object is displayed in a non-notification mode and a character is displayed in a first display mode; when a result of a lottery is winning, the notification object is displayed in a notification mode and the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode after the pre-notification scene.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of fixed identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information.

Some pachinko gaming machines, typified by gaming machines, display multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) variably in response to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (for example, patents (See Reference 1). In addition, a complete announcement mode was provided as one of the performance modes, and in the complete announcement mode, a police lamp image resembling a lamp was displayed in the center of the display means, and there were some that lit up the police lamp image when announcing the winner (for example, , see Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-86392 Publication Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-146680

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations of both Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
Display means;
The display means is
In the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, the character is displayed in a first display mode,
When the specific display result is derived, after the pre-announcement scene, displaying the announcement object in an announcement mode and displaying the character in a second display mode different from the first display mode;
If the specific display result is not derived, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. death,
The game control means is
Performing variable display of the specific identification information based on multiple types of variable display patterns,
controllable into a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state;
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed in the corresponding display area,
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches a pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, a moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved, and a preliminary operation display in which the decorative identification information is operated in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display are performed. It is possible to
performing the preliminary operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
Performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means,
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. is,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is scrolled. By performing a preliminary operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from scroll display before starting display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, by indicating the success or failure in the form of the notification object and supplementarily changing the display form of the character, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in Embodiment 1. FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure for explaining a decorative pattern and a small pattern. (A1) (A2) is the first production mode, (B1) (B2) is the second production mode, (C1) (C2) is the third production mode, (D1) (D2) is the fourth production mode. FIG. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the first production mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second production mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative patterns in the third production mode, (D1 and D2) in the fourth production mode, and (E) is a diagram showing the variable display of decorative and small symbols. FIG. , (A) is a diagram showing a variation start action of a decorative pattern, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating an operation example of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 1st production mode. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 26. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 2nd production mode. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in FIG. 28; It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern as modification 1. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative designs following FIG. 31. It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern in a 3rd performance mode. It is a figure for explaining how a decorative pattern looks. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 4th production mode. It is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). 37 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. 36. FIG. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is three in the first production mode (second production mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode (third performance mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. It is a figure which shows the flow of a background change in a 1st production mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first production mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second production mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the time of starting variable display in the first production mode, (B) in the second production mode, and (C) in the third production mode and the fourth production mode. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of customer waiting demonstration performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a starting prize occurs during the customer waiting demonstration performance. It is a figure which shows the flow of a pseudo consecutive notice. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive number display and symbol color, (B) is a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive number display and the type of symbol color, and (C) is a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive number display color determination table. . It is a diagram showing the flow of reach performance. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of reach performance following FIG. 50. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of each part in reach production. It is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach performance. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of SP ready-to-reach performance following FIG. 53. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of each part in SP reach effect. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing modification example 2 of the present invention. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 3 of the present invention. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used in a low probability state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used in a high probability state. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production mode decision processing performed in ending production processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of super reach (battle). FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fanfare performance executed in a low probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fanfare performance executed in a low probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fanfare performance executed in a low probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an ending effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a patrol lamp used in super reach (pattop attack). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (pattop attack). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (pattop attack). FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example in which a continuous hit operation is required in super reach (pat-pat attack). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (pattop attack). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (pattop attack). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (powerful RUSH). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (powerful RUSH). FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example in which a continuous hitting operation is required in super reach (powerful RUSH). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (powerful RUSH). FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fanfare performance executed in a high probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fanfare performance executed in a high probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a modification in which a police lamp image and a push button image are displayed in operation during the operation promotion period. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each production period when a jackpot is achieved in super reach (battle). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each production period when a jackpot is achieved with super reach (powerful RUSH). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each production period when a jackpot is achieved with super reach (pat-pat attack). It is an explanatory view showing an example of each production period when each super reach is out. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a swinging display period of a decorative pattern according to the timing at which a notification is made by pressing the push button 31B in a super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a period in which a decorative pattern is swayed and displayed in accordance with the timing at which notification is made by repeatedly pressing the push button 31B in a modified example of the super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance period according to the timing at which an announcement is made by pressing the push button 31B in a super reach (pattop attack) jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance period according to the timing at which an announcement is made by repeatedly pressing the push button 31B in a modified example of the super reach (pattop attack) jackpot. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance period of a fanfare performance executed in a low probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance period of a fanfare performance executed in a high probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a modification in which a light condensing effect production is performed before the operation promotion period. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production period of a light condensing effect production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a modification regarding a patrol lamp image displayed when a candidate is not elected.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
Type 1 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to variably display reduced identification information that is smaller in size than the decoration identification information and corresponds to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display (for example, a scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (for example, a switching display, see FIG. 22(E)) that switches to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and the reduced identification information is switched multiple times in a period until the one decoration identification information finishes displaying. is possible (for example, in a period Ta2 when one decorative pattern is displayed and until the display of the decorative pattern ends, the small pattern is switched five times, and the small pattern is displayed for each period Ta1). (period Ta1 < period Ta2; see FIG. 22(E)),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is configured by a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, Before the display result is derived, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not occur in the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 , when it is decided to stop displaying a fixed decorative pattern (e.g., "326") in a losing combination, after starting variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern (e.g., "326") in a losing combination is displayed. Before stopping and displaying the ``326'' pattern, the display is switched so that the small pattern of the same "326" combination as the decorative pattern is not displayed. (See Figure 22 (E))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the variable display of reduced identification information is displayed before the display result of the variable display of decoration identification information is derived. Since the reduced identification information is switched so that the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination in Since the information that will be derived is not known in advance, it is possible to prevent a loss of interest.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
Type 2 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is composed of a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C). , the part where you can win or lose depending on the combination of decorative symbols such as "111" and "326" stopped at the stop position of 5R),
When a non-specific combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information is displayed as the valid display. When stopping in the area, it is possible to display the decoration identification information enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 A part where a variable stop action can be executed when temporarily stopping a decorative pattern in the display (see Figures 36 to 38, Figures 42 and 43),
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is displayed in an enlarged manner, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner (see modification 3 of FIG. 57);
While the variable display of the decorative identification information is being performed, a predetermined light emission control that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a predetermined light emitting period is repeatedly performed, and the decorative identification information that is stopped in the effective display area is displayed in an enlarged manner. (For example, even when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable stop action when displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The part where the loop light emission control of the movable lamp 9d is performed (see FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area is By once enlarging the display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area, and even if a non-specific combination that originally has no meaning to the player is derived, the player's line of sight can be drawn. It can be pinned to the area where the decorative identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the decorative identification information that is stopped in the valid display area in an enlarged manner, the decorative identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner, so that the player's line of sight can be focused on the decorative identification information that is stopped in the valid display area. At the same time, the load on display control can be reduced. Moreover, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is displayed in an enlarged manner, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a front movement display (for example, a scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing transparency and is erased (see FIGS. 28 to 30). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, the other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the other decoration identification information While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the first decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 30 As shown in (A) and (B), one decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after it is displayed in the frame until it is displayed in the frame. Other decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "3") located on the back side so as to partially overlap with the decorative pattern "2" may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". While the character in the character display section 002SG052 with the symbol "3" is displayed, the number ("3") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), as shown in FIG. 30(C). The part where the number ("3") of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed after the decorative pattern "2" is erased.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when performing front movement display in which decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing transparency and erased, other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information passes through the first decoration identification information and becomes visible, but at this time, the character image of the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numerical image of the other decorative identification information is displayed after the first decorative identification information is deleted, the numerical image of the first decorative identification information and the numerical image of the other decorative identification information are displayed overlapping each other. This prevents the numerical image of the first decorative identification information located on the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, a scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 31 and 32). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the one decoration identification information becomes visible. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 31 As shown in (G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so it is displayed in the frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from when the first decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed to the frame-out, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") located behind the first decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is "2") may pass through the decorative pattern "3" and become visible. At this time, while the characters in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" are displayed, the numbers ( "2") is a part that is difficult to see (or is not displayed). Modification example 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when performing front movement display in which decoration identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing transparency and erased, other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information passes through the decoration identification information 1 and becomes visible, but at this time, the character image of the decoration identification information 1 located on the front side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numeric image of the first decoration identification information is displayed after the other decoration identification information is deleted, the numeric image of the other decoration identification information and the numeric image of the first decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. This prevents the numerical images of other decorative identification information located on the back side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
Type 5 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a rotating display in which the decoration identification information is rotated and the front and back sides of the decoration identification information are repeatedly displayed (see FIGS. 33 and 34);
During the rotational display, the decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state, and when the rotational display stops, the decoration identification information is in a non-transparent state (see FIGS. 33 and 34);
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information that is in a semi-transparent state during the rotational display is displayed, the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34);
During execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a predetermined light emission control that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control continues even during the rotational display. (For example, even when variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the high base state, the order of white, blue, and yellow is displayed based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A part where the light emitting pattern may be repeatedly executed. Modification example (see Fig. 44)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when rotating the decoration identification information and repeatedly displaying the front and back sides of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that only the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed. However, in this case, while the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information is displayed, the number image on the back side is not displayed, so the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information is displayed. The image and the number image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, and it is possible to prevent the number image on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. Further, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during rotational display, control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
Type 5 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between the
When the specific display result is derived, after the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, the decoration identification information that forms the reach state is The decoration identification information of the same type becomes a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) that stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, it is possible to execute a reach line suggestion effect that displays and erases a reach line effect display (002SG250) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is transmitted at a first transparency (for example, a first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion effect is executed. state, and after executing the reach line suggestion effect, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is changed to a second transparency lower in transparency than the first transparency (for example, second transmittance F2). (see Figure 52),
After execution of the reach line suggestion effect, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area ( For example, after execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is set to be higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing at which the second transmittance F2, which has a low transmittance (transparency), is set is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area. At the same time, at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is deleted from the third area, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes The decorative identification information suggests the reach line without interfering with the image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
Form 6 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
comprising a light emitting means;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between,
When the specific display result is derived, after the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, the decoration identification information that forms the reach state is The decoration identification information of the same type becomes a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) that stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, it is possible to execute a reach line suggestion effect that displays and erases a reach line effect display (002SG250) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach line suggestion effect),
When executing the reach line suggestion effect, an enlarged display for enlarging the decoration identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separation display for separating the decoration identification information after executing the enlarged display. It is possible to execute (see Figures 50 to 52),
The second period from the start to the end of the separated display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period from the start to the end of the enlarged display is longer). The second period te1 from the start to the end of the distance display is longer than the first period td1 (td1<te1; see FIG. 52),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to perform light-off control to turn off the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 A part that turns off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B placed around (nearby). See FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. At the same time, the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area is enlarged and displayed for a first period, and then displayed at a distance for a second period that is longer than the first period, so that the decoration forming a reach state is displayed. The identification information can be recognized by the player. Further, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more clearly.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
Type 7 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
comprising a light emitting means;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between the
When the specific display result is derived, after the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, the decoration identification information that forms the reach state is The decoration identification information of the same type becomes a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) that stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, it is possible to execute a reach line suggestion effect that displays and erases a reach line effect display (002SG250) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to perform light-off control to turn off the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 A part that turns off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (nearby). See FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area. At the same time, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more clearly.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
Type 8 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control for operating the decoration identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed for a first period (for example, a display control for effect control). When the CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a low base state, a loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern ends. (See FIG. 23(C), FIG. 42, FIG. 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined light emission control that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode is repeatedly performed for a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 , A portion that repeatedly executes loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state. (see FIG. 24(B), FIG. 42, and FIG. 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern in the high base state in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C). , the part where the loop action of the decorative pattern is not executed when temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of 5R (see Figure 44),
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4; see FIG. 24(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to display the decorative identification information in a variable manner, while in a special state where variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is excessively performed. This will prevent you from feeling bothered by this. Moreover, since the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
Type 9 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
Information regarding the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as pending storage information (for example, in the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 stores the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and stores the pending storage number). the part that performs the updating process),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, "111" stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, The part where you can win or lose depending on the combination of decorative patterns such as "326")
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification When stopping information in the effective display area, the decoration identification information is enlarged from a normal size and then displayed in a manner that returns to the normal size according to the number of pending memories stored as the pending storage information. (For example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern. See FIGS. 36 to 39),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, when the decoration identification information is stopped in the valid display area, the storage information is stored as the suspended storage information. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the decoration identification information is maintained at the normal size (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, regardless of the number of reserved memories) When a variable display based on a shortened variation pattern is executed, the variation stop action is not executed and the display is temporarily stopped while maintaining the size (see Figures 39 and 44)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the interest is improved by creating variations in the movement when the decorative identification information stops depending on the number of retained memories, while the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is visible. In special situations where it is difficult to do so, it is possible to stop the display while maintaining the size, so that the visibility of the decoration identification information is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The game machine of form 10 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The part where the transmittance (transparency) decreases and becomes faded),
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) A portion that is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21. See FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, basically, the shorter the fade-out display is executed, the more abruptly it appears to have disappeared, so it is possible that the variable display of decoration identification information and the background change are executed at the same time. In some cases, by executing the identification information fade-out display in a shorter period of time than the background fade-out display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the variable display of the decorative identification information has started.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The transmittance (transparency) also decreases and the parts appear faded in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a part where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
The gaming machine of form 12 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The transmittance (transparency) also decreases and the parts appear faded in),
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is in the decorative pattern display area In the scroll display of 5L, 5C, and 5R, the portion that is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from the start of deceleration of the display speed until the temporary stop display (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).See Figures 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that it appears suddenly the shorter the period of time it is executed, so it is possible that the variable display of decoration identification information and the background change are executed at the same time. In some cases, by performing the identification information fade-in display in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display, it is possible to draw attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The transmittance (transparency) also decreases and the parts appear faded in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, the part where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43) )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
The gaming machine of form 14 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
After the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute a specific effect that restarts the variable display (for example, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is restarted after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed. , a part that can execute a "pseudo continuous notice" that incites whether or not to make one variable display appear to be pseudo variable display multiple times),
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of multiple colors (for example, blue, red) including a numerical image,
When restarting the variable display in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo continuous number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display has been restarted can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red). (See Figures 48 and 49),
In the specific performance, the number image of the temporary stop-displayed decorative identification pattern and the number image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the number image of the temporary stop-displayed decoration identification pattern and the number image are of the same type. When the first combination of colors is different, the number image of the temporarily stopped display of the decorative identification pattern and the number image of the number of times when the variable display is restarted, and the number of the number image of the temporarily stopped and displayed decoration identification pattern and the number of times. There are cases where both colors of the image are the same type of second combination,
In the specific performance, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted using the second combination than when the variable display is restarted using the first combination (for example, when the variable display is restarted using the second combination) In the continuous notice, the display color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and the case where the display color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are the same color. There are cases where it becomes the second combination, and the jackpot game state is more likely to occur when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive notice. (areas where the percentage of control is high)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of numbers and colors of the temporary stop display of the decoration identification information number image and the number image when it is executed. This improves the interest of the game.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
The gaming machine of form 15 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to variably display reduced identification information that is smaller in size than the decoration identification information and corresponds to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 the part that executes variable display of the design),
When variable display is not being executed, it is possible to execute a standby effect that displays a predetermined image (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demonstration designation command output from the main board 11, A part that can execute a "customer waiting demonstration performance" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command such as a display start designation command (see FIG. 46),
While executing the standby effect, the display of the reduced identification information is continued while the decoration identification information is hidden (see FIG. 46);
If the variable display start condition is satisfied while executing the standby effect, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image becomes non-display, and then the predetermined image becomes non-display. After the decoration identification information is displayed, the variable display starts (for example, if a starting prize occurs while the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden). The variable display of small symbols starts before the customer waits, and then the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the current performance mode (here, the background image corresponding to the first performance mode) is displayed. 1 background image 002SG081), a decorative pattern is displayed, and scrolling starts. See Figure 47)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by starting the variable display of the decoration identification information after the predetermined image is hidden, the player can recognize that the variable display has started when the variable display start condition is met. However, since the variable display of the reduced identification information starts before the predetermined image becomes non-display, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
The gaming machine of form 16 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the normal state, when performing the switching display, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first reservation display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure reservation memory display area 5U) is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbol does not start until the pending shift display period until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed. , the part where the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the pending shift display period ends (see FIGS. 26(C) to 26(F)),
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the performance control process processing in step S76). (a part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, A part that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the reach variation pattern specification command). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By displaying a preliminary operation that operates in a manner different from that displayed, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the switching display. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the preliminary operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display ends (for example, the left The first pending display 002SG101, which had been displayed in the first display area, is moved to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbols are scrolled ( 26 (C) - (F )reference),
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the performance control process processing in step S76). (a part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, A part that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the reach variation pattern specification command). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By performing a preliminary operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information starts before the corresponding display is displayed. The discomfort caused by this can be eliminated. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the special state, when performing the switching display, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first reservation display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure reservation memory display area 5U) is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbol does not start until the pending shift display period until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed. , The part where the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the pending shift display period ends. Modified example),
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control process in step S76). (The part that executes the variable display of decorative patterns based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during processing)

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, A part that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the reach variation pattern specification command). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By displaying a preliminary operation that operates in a manner different from that displayed, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the switching display. Further, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to make the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state more exciting. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the preliminary operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display ends (for example, when the left side in the special figure hold storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101, which had been displayed in the first display area, is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display of decorative symbols is continued until the pending shift display period until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 ends. The part where the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start, but the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed and the pending shift display period ends. Modification example)
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control process in step S76). (The part that executes the variable display of decorative patterns based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during processing)

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, , a reach variation pattern designation command), a part that executes a shift display that switches and displays the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. (See Figure 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By performing a preliminary operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information starts before the corresponding display is displayed. The discomfort caused by this can be eliminated. Further, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to make the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state more exciting. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
Controllable to one of a plurality of types of performance modes (for example, first performance mode to fourth performance mode) including a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that is displayed fades out),
In the first effect mode, a moving display is performed in which the decoration identification information is moved as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20 (A1) and (A2)),
In the second performance mode, a special variable display that is different from the moving display is performed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20 (B1) and (B2)),
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first production mode ( For example, the part where the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45(A) and (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only the mode of variable display of decoration identification information is different from that in the first presentation mode, but also the fade-out from the start of variable display until the decoration identification information is deleted. Since the display period becomes longer, attention can be drawn to the decoration identification information for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
Controllable to one of a plurality of types of performance modes (for example, first performance mode to fourth performance mode) including a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that is displayed fades out),
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined as one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs depending on whether the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first production mode or the case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second production mode (for example, in the first production mode). The fade-out display periods A21 and A22 are different depending on the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second production mode and the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second production mode. )(See B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the execution period of the fade-out is different depending on whether the predetermined variable display pattern is determined depending on whether the predetermined variable display pattern is controlled in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. Since it becomes difficult for the player to predict the display pattern, the game becomes more interesting.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decoration identification information starts variable display, and a post-variable display period after the decoration identification information starts variable display. (For example, the variable display period of special symbols includes a variable pre-display period from the start of the variable display of special and small symbols until the start of the scrolling display of decorative symbols, and the scrolling display period of decorative symbols. a variable post-indication period after the start of the
The character image is displayed in the variable pre-display period and the variable post-display period,
After the related information image is displayed in the variable pre-display period, it is erased before the variable post-display period starts (for example, the name of the character (character Related information) is displayed during the variable pre-display period, that is, when the fluctuation start action is executed, and before the variable post-display period starts, that is, when the scroll display of the decorative pattern starts. The part to be erased before (see Figure 23(A) and Figure 26)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can deepen their understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decoration identification information starts, that is, when the display is stopped. Further, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview effect, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
In the normal state, control is performed to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (for example, first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (for example, second presentation mode). possible (for example, 1st production mode to 4th production mode, see Figure 20),
In the special state, control is possible to a production mode including a third production mode (for example, a third production mode or a fourth production mode),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first production mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26);
In the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner that does not include the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first production mode, the player can deepen their understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image by displaying the related information image, while in the second production mode and In the 3 effect mode, by erasing the related information image, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview effect, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display section 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot). the part where the performance can be executed),
In the notification effect, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display where the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect. (For example, in the SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, the combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is tentatively displayed. It is stopped and displayed (see Figure 53(F)),
Upon completion of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is being displayed, the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. (The part where the combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily)
A specific image (for example, specific image 002SG075) is operatively displayed in proximity to the numeric image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result being displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is While the operation is displayed (see FIGS. 53 (H) and (I)), in the high base state, a flame is emitted to the number display section 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbol combination that is displayed after the end of the SP reach effect. Part where the specific image 002SG075 shown is not displayed (see FIGS. 54(P) and (S)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the average variable display period is short even though the performance effect is enhanced and livened up by displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance. In the special state, by not displaying the specific image in response to the numerical image of the decoration identification information displayed after the end of the notification effect, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine described in Form 17 or Form 18,
The performance control means is
Based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, erase the corresponding display (for example, active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, active display area 5F). When the corresponding display is erased, an erase effect display (for example, erase effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the pending display is displayed when the clearing effect display is displayed, the clearing effect display is continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is started (for example, the clearing effect 002SG110 is It continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and disappears after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. (See Figure 25 (B3))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period of the performance between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from decreasing. In addition, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the player also recognizes that a new variable display has started by displaying a new corresponding display. can be done.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine described in Form 17 or Form 18,
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (for example, see FIG. 19);
In the special state, the decoration identification information of the first area, the second area, and the third area are displayed in the same size (for example, see FIG. 19);
The third area in the special state is located closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (for example, see FIG. 19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decoration identification information in the first area and the second area are made to look larger, and the decoration identification information in the third area is shifted to give a sense of depth and improve interest. However, in a special state where the average variable display period is short, the decoration identification information is arranged at a position close to the center of the display area, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration identification information can be improved.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

Next, a mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," "Normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach," "Super reach" may be "SP reach," etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are displayed numbers corresponding to a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decorative pattern. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. The notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 20), the remaining time saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 20), which shows the number of remaining time savings, etc., are displayed in front (upper layer) of the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While this prevents the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error displays from being reduced due to duplication, decorative symbols are stored on the back side (lower layer) of the production image. By displaying the decorative patterns, it may be possible to prevent the decorative patterns from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the effect image.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect is performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, and the movable bodies 32A and 32B are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 or Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a part of the decorative pattern is obscured, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being displayed in a variable manner. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, is provided. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in FIG. 1, above and below the image display device 5), movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided that operate according to the performance. Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The lighting and extinguishing of the lights, the movement of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or any performance device including some or all of these may be performed.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notification, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Furthermore, since the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, the images of each of these layers are drawn and displayed in the VRAM area. a layered image drawing area for placement; a display image creation area for further superimposing (synthesizing) the images drawn and placed in each layered image drawing area to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5; is located. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. Three image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area includes a special figure holding memory display area 5U that specifiably displays the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number at the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. At the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, there is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the interface image and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decorative pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decoration pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so it is displayed as a middle layer in the image display device 5. The image (background image) that is displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area has the lowest display priority and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or a drive circuit that drives the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

In addition, audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B, etc.) are for performance control. It may also be executed by the CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which both time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state). Note that the variable probability state with time saving may be simply referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure display result than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). is assigned to. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a low-probable, high-base state with only time-saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable strange jackpot A", "probable strange jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo series), super reach (one pseudo series), and super reach (two pseudo series). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach variation pattern in this embodiment includes a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot. Variable display results as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (1 pseudo-run), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a loss (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is changed to PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -1 (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) using the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table B. ), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous effect 2) (times) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 are determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 are determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 70%. .

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is one or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure. Using the variation pattern determination table A, change the variation pattern to PA1-1 (variation pattern with no shortening, non-reach error), PA2-1 (normal reach error), and PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)), and PA2-4 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or variable probability state), select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-3 (shortened PA2-1 (non-reach deviation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern) pattern) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern is determined according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of The selection ratio of any of the variable patterns for jackpots (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, depending on the gaming state, regardless of the type of jackpot. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variable pattern suitable for the gaming state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 002SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 002SG151B allows execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 002SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 002SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 002SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 002SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 002SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 002SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has a performance control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 002SG191, a performance control timer setting section 002SG192, a performance control counter setting section 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 002SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting unit 002SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 002SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 002SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 002SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 002SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of pending memories of the second special figure pending memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 002SG194A are associated with these starting opening winning designation commands and pending memory number notification commands. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (002SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (002SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 002SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 002SGS102 (002SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (002SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 002SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 002SGS105 (002SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (002SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the starting opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (002SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 sends information to the production control board 12 by, for example, storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command (002SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 002SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 002 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value by subtracting 1, etc. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 002SGS144), the process moves to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 002SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 002 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "0" (step 002SGS148), the process moves to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002 SGS150). In addition, in this step 002SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state in this feature), if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be a "jackpot". ”, and if it is not applicable, it is determined as “miss”.

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" corresponding to the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 002SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when the variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 002SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C", it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is selected (step 002 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 002 SGS 154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 002SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3". Note that after the processing of step 002SGS155, the process advances to step 002SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), the process in step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 responds to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot gaming state. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 002SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32A. , 32B are controlled to operate various production devices. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background image displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background image and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode are and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode are selectively displayed. The first background image and the second background image can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the third background image can be displayed when the gaming state is the low probability high base state. 4 background images can be displayed when the gaming state is a high probability high base state. Furthermore, switching between the first background image and the second background image is performed, for example, when a variable display of SP reach swelling is executed, or when one background image is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is designed to switch when a condition is met.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and also a process of displaying a speaker on the speaker in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is being displayed. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start wait timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the pending storage display (first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102) in the special figure pending storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process is executed to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the display according to the storage contents of the winning command reception command buffer 002SG194A (step S161). After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, a determination is made to execute a pre-read preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display color of the pending display, etc.). A prefetch notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output sounds and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). ) performs various effect controls during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer is "1-0" to "1-4". The various command data and various flags stored in association with " are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y ), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the received command buffer at the time of start winning are stored in the buffer number 1. It is shifted upward one by one (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command to a fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, an odd number other than "7" is used as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is a fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120, for example, selects a combination of decorative symbols with an even number of three symbols as the stop symbols. Determine.

In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a non-probable variable jackpot, the received variable display result designation command is the 3rd variable display result that corresponds to a probability variable jackpot B to a probability variable jackpot C. As with the display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "333", "555", "999") can be used as the stop symbol. A case may also be provided in which the selection is made from among a combination of decorative patterns such as ``. In this case, by making the performance during the jackpot game or the variable display in the variable probability state more common, it is possible to determine whether the gaming state is in the variable probability state or the time saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times. , it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether the time-saving state ends after 100 variable displays or continues until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specification command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern specification command of super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) with pseudo-links. It is determined whether there is one (Step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a super reach fluctuation pattern designation command, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern designation command (step 002SGS278; N), the process advances to step 002SGS383.

If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach fluctuation pattern designation command, the reach The display color of the stop symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and right ornamental symbol display area 5C that form the state is specified. Then, using the pseudo continuous number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo continuous number display (for example, "x2") indicating that two variable displays are to be started is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo-runs (step 002SGS279), and if it is determined to be a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo-runs. (Step 002SGS279; Y), using the pseudo continuous number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo continuous number display (for example, "x3") indicating that three variable displays including the first variable display will be started is determined and stored (step 002SGS280).

If it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not a two-time pseudo series, or if the process in step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo series (step 002SGS281). , proceed to step 002 SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and a process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 002SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern and small pattern on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data written in is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, decorative patterns and small patterns will be explained based on FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. In Figure 20, (A1) (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) (D2) are the fourth production mode. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a mode. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in (A1) and (A2) the first production mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second production mode. 22, (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative patterns in the third production mode, (D1 and D2) in the fourth production mode, and (E) is a diagram showing the relationship between the decorative symbols and the small symbols. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 19, the sizes of the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols are the same as when displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S. Displayed as a ratio.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the gaming state is the low base state are circular number pedestals and A number display section 002SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number pedestal section, and 10 types of characters ( A character display section 002SG052 (all characters not shown) are displayed, an information pedestal section having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and information regarding the characters displayed on the front of the information pedestal section (for example, in this embodiment, , character name); and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG054 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053. Ru.

In this embodiment, the name of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed on the information display section 002SG053, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in section 002SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items owned by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, when the gaming state is the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R (for the high base state) are number display parts consisting of numbers "0" to "9". 002SG061, and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the numeral display section 002SG061. The decorative pattern for the high base state is not provided with a character display section and an information display section like the decorative pattern for the low base state.

Further, in a display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

Next, the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols will be explained.

<Display timing of each symbol> The decorative symbol (for low base state) and the decorative symbol (for high base state) are approximately displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during the period when the power of the image display device 5 is on. Although it is always displayed, it may be erased (hidden), for example, when SP reach performance (super reach performance) is performed during variable display or when customer waiting demonstration performance is performed. On the other hand, the small designs are always displayed in front of the decorative designs (upper layer) while the power of the image display device 5 is on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative designs are erased as described above. Is displayed. Note that when information having a higher display priority than the small symbol (for example, an error display) is displayed, it may be deleted.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> Decorative symbols (for low base state) are displayed in a scrolling manner that moves linearly from the top to the bottom of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first production mode described later. A variable display is executed in the second performance mode, and a variable display is executed in a scroll display that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side.

The decorative symbols (for the high base state) are variablely displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a third presentation mode to be described later, in a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. , In the fourth performance mode, a variable display is performed in a scroll display that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom.

The small symbols can be displayed variably in the switching display (updated display in which the symbols are updated) in which the symbols "0" to "9" are switched in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, regardless of the game state or production mode. executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned "scroll display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display" in which the symbols are switched and displayed, but as described later, they are displayed in a frame-in or fade-in display in the display area. A "scroll display" is a display in which multiple symbols are updated and displayed by frame-out display or fading-out display from the display area after moving and displaying the symbols. A display in which a plurality of symbols are updated and displayed by repeating display and non-display (erasing) or rotating display without displaying a fade-out display may be distinguished from a "switch display".

<Number display section> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have not only number display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054. On the other hand, the small design consists only of a number display section.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and are displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. By displaying the size slightly smaller than the decorative pattern display area 5R, a sense of depth is created. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged linearly in the left-right direction. The small symbols are displayed in the same size in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the vertical center position of the image display device 5, but the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C is arranged at a position slightly above the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5R. In the high base state, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the middle ornament symbol display area 5C in the high base state are more easily displayed on the image display device than the ornamental symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the inner ornament symbol display area 5C in the low base state. 5 (see FIG. 20).

Also, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is taken as a reference, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative symbol (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small symbol is large. is small. In other words, the size of the number display section is larger in the order of decorative symbols (for high base state), decorative symbols (for low base state), and small symbols (size of number display section: decorative symbol (for high base state) > decorative symbol (For low base condition) > Small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each symbol has the same relationship as that of the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to look larger, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to give a sense of depth. In the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the decorative pattern is placed close to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the degree of recognition of the decorative pattern can be improved. (See Figure 20).

Further, the number display portions of the decorative pattern (for the low base state), the decorative pattern (for the high base state), and the small pattern are each formed by a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created with 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) with points placed on three-dimensional coordinates as vertices, information is given to reproduce the material etc. on each surface, (reproduced by illuminating an object from arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but three-dimensional display devices (e.g., images for the right eye (R image) and images for the left eye (L image)) An image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video); a backlight that emits planar light from the back of the image liquid crystal panel toward the front; and a backlight that emits planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel toward the front side; An image that can be viewed three-dimensionally by displaying it on a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel provided at a predetermined interval may also be used.

In addition, among the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative pattern, odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are "probable variable jackpots" that are controlled to a high probability high base state after the jackpot ends. For the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", it is a regular symbol (non-probable variable) corresponding to "non-probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot. pattern). Incidentally, even in the case of a probability-variable jackpot, it may be arranged so that the jackpot combination is predetermined by the normal symbols.

<Character display section> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, as will be described later, the characters displayed on the character display section 002SG052 perform predetermined actions (movements) when variable display starts or stops. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) and the small symbols are not provided with a character display section.

<Information display section> The information display section 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display section 002SG053 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). In addition, the information display section 002SG053 displays a "name" that is information about the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052, and as described later, the "name" is erased at the start of variable display. It has become. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) and the small symbols are not provided with an information display section.

<Pedestal display section> The pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed from a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). . Furthermore, the pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for the high base state) is formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the pedestal display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D images, three-dimensional images). Furthermore, when the size of the pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for the low base state) is taken as a reference, the size of the pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for the high base state) is large. On the other hand, the small pattern is not provided with a pedestal display section.

<Main color> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display parts 002SG051, 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "blue" for odd numbers. The variable pattern is said to be ``red''. Note that the pedestals for numbers other than numbers, the pedestal display parts 002SG054, 002SG064, etc. may be displayed in the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color from the numbers.

Furthermore, the characters displayed on the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main colors. Further, as the character corresponding to the variable probability symbol, for example, when the ally character and the enemy character are separated, it is preferable to use the ally character. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character be the main character of the story, such as the main character in the story among allied characters or a person closely related to the main character.

In addition, as mentioned above, when adapting the story concept of allies and enemies, the preview performance and SP reach performance are basically expressed from the ally's perspective, and the allies and enemies fight in the SP reach performance. In this case, if the result is advantageous for the ally, such as when the ally wins over the enemy, the player is notified of an advantageous situation (for example, a jackpot).

Further, the main color having the highest occupancy rate over the entire area of each of the decorative symbol (for low base state) and the decorative symbol (for high base state) may be composed of the same type of color as the number. Moreover, although the regular symbols made up of even numbers are "blue" and the variable probability symbols made up of odd numbers are "red," they may be of other colors.

In addition, in the high base state, since the scroll display is performed at high speed as described later, it is necessary to make the appeal easier to see than the decorative symbols (for the low base state), so it is necessary to display stop symbol notices, fluctuation start notices, etc. Because it is often executed by intertwining effect display with the symbol, the decorative symbol (for high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is composed of the character display section and the number display section. It is characterized by a larger size ratio of the design than the decorative design (for low base state).

Although illustrations are omitted in this embodiment, the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the high base state) are designed to make the movement more complicated or the design better than the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the low base state). You may also try to liven up the high base state by making it look more flashy, such as by making it taller.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is ``yellow'' for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and ``yellow-green'' for variable patterns consisting of odd numbers. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbols made of even numbers are "yellow" and the variable probability symbols made of odd numbers are "yellow-green," but they may be of other colors. Further, the same numbers as the decorative pattern may have the same color as the decorative pattern.

Regarding the design of the small pattern, it is possible to display the numerical material of the decorative pattern in the low base state or high base state by reducing it as it is, but it is said that the design will enhance the production effect. In order to improve visibility for players, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the decorative numbers (for example, it is flat rather than three-dimensional, and the color is simple without gloss). .

As shown in FIG. 20, the performance control CPU 120 has a first performance mode (see FIGS. 20(A1) and (A2)), a second performance mode (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)), and a second performance mode (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)) as performance modes. It is possible to execute either the third effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (C1) and (C2)) and the fourth effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (D1) and (D2)). The first performance mode and the second performance mode are performance modes that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability low base state. Further, the third production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability high base state, and the fourth production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability high base state. This is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 20 (A1), in the first production mode, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the daytime city scenery is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. The first background image 002SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then displayed in a straight line downward. The frame is displayed downward from the lower side of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen. However, after the preceding decorative pattern of "3" passes the stop position, the preceding decorative pattern of "3" and the subsequent decorative pattern of "4" become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and small symbols are displayed, and the special symbol provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the pending memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F, a first pending display 002SG101 and a second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so their explanation will be omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 20 (B1), in the second production mode, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The displayed second background image 002SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (B2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative symbols approach the center of the screen from the upper left side of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative symbol display area 5R. It is displayed in the frame as shown, and then moves downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and laterally from the lower left side of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative symbol display area 5R. Appears out of frame. The inner decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the inner decorative pattern display area 5C, and then displayed in a frame-out manner.

Further, the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center position of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Sometimes, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), when the preceding "2" decorative symbol is passing near the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the following "3" decorative symbol are However, after the preceding "2" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative pattern and "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 20 (C1), in the third production mode, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the evening city scenery is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The third background image 002SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (C2), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(C1) and (C2), the decorative pattern in the third production mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b which is the opposite surface to the first surface 5a. , a preceding decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. That is, since the pedestal display section 002SG064 has a low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and in the order of the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, etc. By rotating, the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and continues from "0" to "9". The updated display is performed repeatedly. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (C2), when the second surface 5b is displayed by rotating approximately 90 degrees or more from the state in which the first surface 5a faces the front, the second surface 5b has a first A decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) subsequent to the decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) displayed on the surface 5a is displayed. Next, although not particularly illustrated, when the first surface 5a is displayed by rotating approximately 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b faces forward, the first surface 5a has a portion that is displayed on the second surface 5b. The subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "5") following the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "4") is displayed.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. At the lower left corner, a time saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, characters "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (D1), in the fourth production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a night city scene is displayed as the background image of the decorative symbol. The fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (C2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R linearly from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22 (D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then displayed in a straight line downward. The frame is displayed downward from the lower side of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, as shown in Figure 22 (D1), when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are visible. becomes. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promotion of right-handed hitting operations.

In addition, in the second performance mode, the name of the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative pattern is always hidden even when the decorative pattern is stopped. Further, in the third performance mode and the fourth performance mode, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a manner that does not include the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first performance mode, the player can deepen their understanding of the character by drawing attention to the character's name by displaying the information display section 002SG053. By keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden in the production mode, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview production, etc. rather than the characters. Note that not only the name displayed on the information display section 002SG053 but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), the decorative pattern and the small pattern have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is displayed in the frame from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and passes through before being displayed in the frame from the lower side. A period Ta2 is required. That is, a period Ta2 is required until one decorative pattern is displayed and the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed by being switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, 5 times, etc.) in the above period Ta2.

For details, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30FPS (images are displayed at 30 frames per second), from the time the first decorative pattern starts to display until the display ends. 10 frames of images are displayed, and the period Ta2 is approximately 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, as for the small symbols, different combinations of small symbols (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when the first decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern ends, the small patterns are switched five times and are displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1< Period Ta2). Although the small symbols of each out-of-place combination are displayed for a period of time Ta1, it is difficult to confirm visually because it is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds).

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying a fixed decorative symbol of a losing combination (for example, "326") based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is determined to be a missed display result. In this case, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "326") of the above-mentioned outlying combination, the small pattern of the outgoing combination of "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. Switch the display as follows. Therefore, it is prevented that it is known in advance that a decorative pattern of an incorrect combination will be stopped and displayed from a small pattern of an incorrect combination.

In addition, in the scrolling display in the first production mode, the second production mode, and the fourth production mode, and in the rotation display in the third production mode, the decorative design changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, While the variable display speed changes from high to low when the variable display stops, small symbols are now displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops. ing.

(Various actions of decorative patterns)
Next, various operation displays of decorative symbols will be explained based on FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative pattern fluctuation start action, (B) a fluctuation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in FIGS. 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state may be moved within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in order to be displayed variably. It rotates within areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but apart from such variable display movements, it is possible to execute various actions (movements) that change the number display section 002SG051 and character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern. .

(Fluctuation start action)
As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the variable display starts in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, in the decorative pattern, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 has its body direction reversed horizontally. ``Fluctuation start action'' is executed. Specifically, in the fluctuation start action A1, the character is placed in a normal mode with both hands on the waist and facing diagonally to the right, and in the fluctuation start action A2, the character is set in a mode in which the character raises both hands upward and spreads them out and faces forward. In action A3, the character places his hands on his hips and faces diagonally forward to the left. For convenience of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation start action A1, A2, and A3 are displayed here, but in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the fluctuation start action period (A1 to A3). As a result, a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the character's body orientation changes in the order of diagonally forward right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward left (A3).

Next, after the character's body direction is diagonally forward to the left, the decorative pattern moves (rises) a predetermined distance from the stop position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then starts moving downward. Scroll display starts. These fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 are the fluctuation start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 24) from when the variable display of the special symbol starts until when the scroll display of the decorative symbol (downward movement of the decorative symbol) starts. It is carried out over a period of time.

Here, for convenience of explanation, only the states of four frames of fluctuation start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed, but in reality, during the fluctuation start action period Tb1 until the direction of the character's body is reversed, several frames are displayed. A variation start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's motion for ten frames.

In this embodiment, as a variation start action, a mode in which the direction of the character's body is reversed horizontally is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start action may be It is possible to change the character to a mode other than the above, for example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the character's body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054 forming the decorative pattern takes an action. In other words, the fluctuation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts scrolling or rotating display, and is an action that changes in the scroll display, that is, a separate action that operates in a manner different from the scroll display. be.

Further, in the first performance mode, the character name (character related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden) during the fluctuation start action period Tb1. In this way, while the character name is made easier to see when the character is stopped and displayed, the character name is hidden after the scroll display has started, thereby drawing attention to the scroll display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbol includes a pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol and small symbol until the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbol, and a period before the variable display of the decorative symbol. and a variable post-display period after being initiated. The character name (character related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is executed, and then the post-variable display period starts. , that is, before the scroll display of the decorative pattern starts. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, that is, before the scroll display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview effect, etc. rather than the name.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols until the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbols is taken as the variable pre-display period. The pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display start conditions are met until the variable display of decorative symbols starts, that is, the period when the starting winning occurs and the pending memory. The period may be any period from the start of the variable display based on the base to the start of the scroll display of the decorative pattern.

(Fluctuating stop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(B), when the variable display ends in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), the decorative pattern is displayed on the character display section 002SG052. A "fluctuating stop action" is executed in which the character being displayed is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the character changes from the normal mode in which the character puts his hands on his hips and faces diagonally to the right (fluctuating stop action B1), to the normal mode. After being enlarged and displayed so as to protrude significantly upward from the pedestal display section 002SG054 (fluctuation stop action B2), the display is reduced and restored to the normal state (fluctuation stop action B3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, only the states of three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are displayed, but in reality, during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2 from when the character is enlarged until the character is restored, several frames are displayed. A variable stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's motion over ten frames.

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode in which a character is displayed in an enlarged manner is illustrated as an example of the variation stop action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation stop action may be performed in a mode other than the above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the character's body may move. Alternatively, at least one of the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054 forming a decorative pattern may take an action. In other words, the variable stop action is an action that is executed when the scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed as a temporary stop, and is an action that is different from an action that changes like a scroll display or a rotating display.

(loop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(C), when the variable display ends in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped displayed until it is stopped and displayed (determined pattern)), the decorative pattern Now, a "loop action" is executed in which the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052 repeats shrinking and restoring, and the number display section 002SG051 repeats horizontal rotation about the rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction.

Specifically, in the loop action C1, the character places both hands on the waist and faces diagonally to the right, and the number display section 002SG051 faces the front in a normal mode, and in the loop action C2, the character moves to the pedestal display section 002SG054. At the same time, the number display section 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right, and in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, and the number display section 002SG051 is displayed in front. In the loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so as to fit in the pedestal display section 002SG054, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over a loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action C1 is executed again, and the loop actions C1 to C4 are performed again over a loop action period Tb3. is executed. That is, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are periodically executed.

For convenience of explanation, only four frames of loop actions C1 to C4 are displayed here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated and restored. In the loop action period Tb3 up to this point, a loop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character and number display section 002SG051 over several tens of frames.

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display section 002SG051 rotates as a loop action is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the loop action can be changed to a mode other than the above, for example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the character's body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054 forming the decorative pattern takes an action. In other words, the loop action is an action that is executed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position until it is stopped and displayed (the pattern is confirmed), and is an action that is different from the action that changes in the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emitting periods)
Next, various actions of the decorative pattern and light emission control of the lamp will be explained based on FIG. 24. In FIG. 24, (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 24(A), the variation start action period Tb1, which is the execution period, of the variation start actions A1 to A4 (see FIG. 23(A)) of the decorative symbols is approximately 1.5 seconds (the variation start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds) and consists of approximately 45 frames of images. In addition, the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, which is the execution period, of the fluctuation stop actions B1 to B3 of the decorative symbols (see FIG. 23(B)) is approximately 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds). ), consisting of approximately 28 frames of images. In addition, in the loop actions C1 to C4 of the decorative patterns (see FIG. 23(C)), the loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, is approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), It consists of approximately 55 frames of images.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(B), a movable body lamp 9d provided on each of the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, The main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3 emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is the low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, the light is emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow" over the loop light emission period Tb4, which is one cycle, and after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, the light returns to "white" and the loop light is emitted again. During period Tb4, light is emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", and this is periodically repeated. That is, in the loop light emission control, "white", "blue", and "yellow" light emission is periodically executed.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in the low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, while in the high base state, where variable display is more likely to be executed than in the low base state. This can prevent variable display from being excessively promoted and causing users to feel bothered. Moreover, since the loop action is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the loop light emission control, the decorative pattern can suitably stand out.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified in which "white", "blue", and "yellow" light is periodically executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, after emitting light in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", A light emitting pattern in which light is emitted in sequence may be performed periodically, or a light emitting pattern in which four or more colors of light are emitted in order may be performed periodically.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state and the performance mode is the first performance mode or the second performance mode, but It is not executed when the performance mode is controlled to be in the high base state and the performance mode is the third performance mode or the fourth performance mode. Further, in the loop light emission control of the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 24(B), the gaming state is controlled to the low base state and the production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode. However, it is not executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high base state and the performance mode is the third performance mode or the fourth performance mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be explained based on FIG. 25. In FIG. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A1), when the game is on standby (the number of pending memories is "0"), the special figure pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 are , the pending display is not displayed. The special figure pending memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to the buffer number "1-1" in the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning, and the second display area from the left The areas correspond to buffer numbers "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer numbers "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer numbers "1-4". ing.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when a starting winning (for example, the first starting winning) occurs during game standby, a first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure holding memory display area 5U. is displayed. Next, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 25 (A3)), and then moves diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F in a parabolic manner. However, when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 25 (A2), at the time when a starting prize occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure pending storage display area 5U, and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but the first starting winning When the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of , the variable display of the small symbols is started in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U is not active. The display has not been switched to active display 002SG103 after moving to area 5F, that is, the shift display has not finished. It is difficult to tell whether the scroll display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 has started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the pending shift display until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols does not start until the period ends, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols starts after the pending shift display period ends. It has become so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (B1), when a decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of pending memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of pending memories is "2"), the image display device In the special figure holding memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of 5, the first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 is displayed in the active display area 5F. has been done.

As shown in FIG. 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to active display 002SG103 displayed in active display area 5F ends, active display 002SG103 displayed in active display area 5F is erased, and the corresponding A deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

In addition, the deletion effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is deleted, and as shown below, the next variable corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left The display starts and then disappears. In this way, by not creating a blank period of the performance between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from decreasing. Further, while the erasure effect 002SG110 makes the player aware that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, a new active display 002SG103 is displayed to start a new variable display. can be recognized.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (Fig. 25 (B3)), move diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F as if drawing a parabola, and move from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, as active display 002SG103. The display is switched (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left horizontally moves toward the left as the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left moves. (see FIG. 25 (B3)) and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased with the end of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the first display area from the left Although the 1st pending display 002SG101 has not yet been moved to the active display area 5F, when the moving display of the 1st pending display 002SG101 starts, the variable display of the small symbols will start in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols. .

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U is not active. Since the movement to area 5F (shift display) has not been completed, if the scroll display of decorative symbols starts in this state, it will not be possible to know which first pending display 002SG101 the scroll display has started. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the hold shift display period until the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103. Until the end of the period, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed before the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols starts, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is executed after the pending shift display period ends. It is about to start.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F have a common aspect in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, so that the shift display shown in FIG. Although it is designed to be executed in a common manner in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, for example, when providing a special figure holding storage display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each production mode, each It may be possible to perform shift display in a mode corresponding to the production mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, the production control CPU 120 operates in a manner common to multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, etc.) A shift display is performed in which the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 are switched to the active display 002SG103 in a mode in which the hold display moves in a mountainous trajectory up to the display area 5F, but it is compatible with each variation pattern and each production mode. It may also be possible to perform shift display of a plurality of types of operation modes. Furthermore, it may be possible to perform a shift display that has different operating modes depending on whether the gaming state is a low base state or a high base state.

In addition, the operation mode that is common to multiple types of variation patterns in the shift display is at least one of multiple factors such as the display mode until the pending display is switched to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period. Including those with common elements.

In this embodiment, with the occurrence of a starting prize, after the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U, Although the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is moved and displayed (shifted) from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, if the number of pending memories is "0", the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special drawing pending memory display area 5U due to the occurrence of a starting prize, and the active display is The active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the first pending display 002SG101 is used as a switching display (shift display) for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the display is moved non-linearly (for example, in a mountain pattern) from the first display area from the left in the display area 5U toward the active display area 5F, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed moving linearly toward the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not only the one that slides the pending display, but also the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F and the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U. The first pending display 002SG101 that has been displayed may be erased once, and the display of the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display may be started in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described based on FIGS. 26 to 35. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first production mode. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second production mode. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 28. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in FIG. 28. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flow of variable display of decorative patterns as Modification 1. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 31. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third production mode. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern looks. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth production mode.

In addition, in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams with lines other than solid lines (for example, one-dot chain lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are not displayed on the display screen. This is not a representation of the image that was created, but is provided to explain the movement of the image.

(Example of operation of variable display in first production mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 26 and 27.

FIG. 26(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at a stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, The decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 26(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 26(B) continues for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 26(E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and when the upward movement (action A4) is completed, the downward movement is started and scrolling is performed, as shown in FIG. 26(F). Display starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, the ascending action A4 is started, and the ascending movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(G), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are completed, the ascending action A4 is started, and the ascending movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(H), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed starts in the order of the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the middle ornamental symbol display area, but the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the action to start the variation is performed, so the player does not know that the variable display has started. can be recognized.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of operation of variable display in second production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the second performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 28 and 29.

FIG. 28(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the second performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2"). In addition, in the second performance mode, the name of the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative symbol is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, while the variable display of the small symbol starts, The decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 28(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the deletion effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 28(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 28(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F ends, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and when the backward movement to the back of the display screen (action A4) is completed, it moves forward as shown in FIG. 28(F). begins to move and scroll display begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(G), forward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(H), forward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed starts in the order of the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the middle ornamental symbol display area, but the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the action to start the variation is performed, so the player does not know that the variable display has started. can be recognized.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28(F) and 28(G), the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, and after reaching a medium speed shown in FIG. 28(H), The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scroll display in the second effect mode is configured to move and disappear from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 30(A) and 30(B), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the back side to the front side, so the decorative pattern display area 5L, From the time it is displayed in the frame to 5C and 5R until the time it is displayed in the frame, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located so that it partially overlaps with the other A decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") may pass through the decorative pattern "2" and become visible. At this time, while the character in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 30(C). As shown, after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number ("3") in the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located on the back side of the first decorative pattern "2" becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "2", but in this case, the other decorative pattern "3" located on the back side For the other decorative pattern "3", the character in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed, but the number in the number display section 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number in the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, so the number ``2'' of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern ``3'' are not displayed overlapping, and the ``2'' of the decorative pattern located on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from being put away.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the decorative pattern is displayed in a frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then displayed in a frame-out as shown in FIG. 30(C). The pattern is moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency) until it is displayed, but at the start of variable display, the decorative pattern is moved in proportion to the increase in display speed, as described above. Since the display is designed to fade out, the display fades out depending on the display speed and is moved from the back of the screen to the front of the screen while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display, it appears as shown in Figures 30(A) to 30(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is achieved, the screen appears at the back of the screen. Even on the side, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the decorative design.

(Example of operation of variable display as modification 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns starts as Modification 1 will be described based on FIGS. 31 and 32. In this modification example 1, the decorative patterns are scrolled in a curved manner as in the second production mode, but they move from the side opposite to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side. There is.

The flow in FIGS. 31(A) to 31(D) is the same as that in FIGS. 28(A) to 28(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 31(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F ends, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and when the forward movement toward the front of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the backward movement is started. begins to move and scroll display begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(G), backward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(H), backward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed starts in the order of the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the middle ornamental symbol display area, but the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the action to start the variation is performed, so the player does not know that the variable display has started. can be recognized.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display. As the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scroll display as Modification 1 is configured to move and erase from the front side of the screen toward the back side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so the decorative pattern display area 5L, During the period from being displayed in the frame to 5C and 5R until being displayed in the frame, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located so that it partially overlaps with the other A decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") may be visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, while the character of the decorative pattern "2" in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed, the number ("2") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side of the first decorative pattern "3" becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "3", but in this case, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side For the other decorative pattern "2", the character in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed, but the number in the number display section 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number in the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, so the number ``3'' of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern ``2'' are not displayed overlapping, and the ``3'' of the decorative pattern located on the front side is difficult to understand. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, in this modification example 1, after the decorative pattern is displayed in the frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until it is displayed in the frame, the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative design is designed to fade out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so the display fades out in proportion to the display speed. However, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display, it looks as shown in Figures 31 (F) to 31 (H), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is achieved, the screen appears at the back of the screen. Even on the side, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the decorative design.

(Example of operation of variable display in 3rd production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the third production mode will be described based on FIGS. 33 and 34.

FIG. 33(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols that have been rotated and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hand hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the nearer side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts; Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 33(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 33(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 33(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 33(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Rotation display of the decorative pattern displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R The rotational display of 002SG101, which is displayed in the first display area from the left, moves to the active display area 5F until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 is moved to the active display area 5F ends. The rotational display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the rotating display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the rotating display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the rotating display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes high as shown in FIG. 33(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 34, the rotating display in the third production mode is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display the first side 5a and the second side 5b, and during the rotating display, the decorative pattern is in a semi-transparent state. , becomes non-transparent when the rotating display stops. The number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a side of the decorative pattern which becomes semi-transparent during rotational display is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b side is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), in a semi-transparent state where the decorative pattern is rotated at a low speed and the transmittance is the first transmittance, the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the decorative pattern, the number "326" displayed on the first side 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (to be displayed) on the second side 5b, which is the back side, is difficult to see. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B), in a semi-transparent state where the decorative pattern is rotated and displayed at a medium speed and the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern display area 5L, In the decorative patterns displayed on 5C and 5R, the number "437" displayed on the second side 5b is visible, but the number "548" displayed (to be displayed) on the first side 5a, which is the reverse side, is visible. ' is said to be difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(C), in a semi-transparent state where the decorative pattern is rotated and displayed at high speed and the transmittance is a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C , 5R, the number "763" displayed on the first side 5a is difficult to see, but it is visible, and the number "763" displayed on the second side 5b (the back side) is (scheduled to be displayed). "874" is said to be difficult to see. Note that during high-speed rotation display, both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see.

In this way, when rotating a decorative pattern and repeatedly displaying the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, so that the surface of the decorative pattern (for example, the first side 5a) Not only the side but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) can be seen through and become visible, but in this case, while the numbers on the front side (e.g., first side 5a) are displayed, the numbers on the back side (e.g., number 5b) are displayed. Since the numbers on the 2nd side 5b) are not displayed, the numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern and the numbers on the back side will not be displayed overlapping, which prevents the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. can. Furthermore, even when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern is in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). may be executed repeatedly, and by doing so, the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d can be simplified.

(Example of operation of variable display in 4th production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the fourth production mode will be described based on FIG. 35.

FIG. 35(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scroll-displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the fourth production mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hand hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the nearer side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols. (See Figure 23(A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 35(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 35(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 35(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 35(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 35(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbol display area 5L, Scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes high as shown in FIG. 35(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

As explained above, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs the action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type of fluctuation pattern designation command ( For example, when a variable display is executed based on a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command), By being able to perform a common shift display, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the common shift display is performed, so the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing a pending shift display with the start of variable display, and also displays a special symbol pending memory display. Until the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in area 5U, is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of decorative symbols is not started, while in the high base state , the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative pattern fluctuation start action is not performed while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols when performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs The scroll display of the decorative symbols may not be started until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type When a variable display is executed based on a variation pattern specification command of the second type (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command) Since it is possible to perform a common shift display even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, a common shift display can be performed even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, reducing the number of shift display patterns. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display ends, the left , the right, and the center display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. With the start of the variable display, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the display is displayed in any one of the left, right, and center decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. If the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is started, the scrolling display of the decorative pattern in any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started when the shift display is being performed. It's okay.

(Example of operation of each part when the symbol is stopped and displayed)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the symbol is stopped will be explained based on FIGS. 36 to 40. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. 36. FIG. 38 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). FIGS. 39A and 39B are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth production mode (third production mode).

(Example of operation of symbol stop display in 1st production mode [number of pending memories “2 or less”])
First, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the deviation variation pattern when the number of pending memories is 2 or less in the first production mode will be explained based on FIGS. 36 and 37. do. It should be noted that the second presentation mode is substantially the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches in a state where the decorative pattern is scrolled at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed display The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed, is reduced, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative patterns improves. (See FIG. 36(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 36(C)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display area 002SG052 The character displayed in is enlarged (see FIG. 36(D)), and then a fluctuation stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) to restore the original size is executed (see FIG. 36(E)). Then, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the temporarily stopped display state, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

When the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative pattern improves (see FIG. 36(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 36(G)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display area 002SG052 The character displayed in is enlarged (see FIG. 36(H)), and then a fluctuation stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed to restore the original size (see FIG. 37(I)). Then, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the temporarily stopped display state, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

When the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative pattern improves (see FIG. 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 37(K)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display area 002SG052 The character displayed in is enlarged (see FIG. 37(L)), and then a fluctuation stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) to restore the original size is executed (see FIG. 37(M)). Then, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the temporarily stopped display state, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is finished and is stopped and displayed. Active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 37(M)).

(Example of operation of symbol stop display in 1st production mode [number of pending memories: 3 pieces])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first production mode will be explained based on FIGS. 38(A) to 38(G). . In addition, since the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches in a state where the decorative pattern is scrolled at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed display The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed, is reduced, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative patterns improves. (See FIG. 38(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 38(C)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052 The fluctuation stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Further, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. The fade-in display is executed gradually, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 36(E)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052 The fluctuation stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Further, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. As the display progresses, a fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 38(G)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052 The fluctuation stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Further, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is finished and is stopped and displayed. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 38(G)).

(Example of operation of symbol stop display in 4th production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display in the fourth production mode will be described based on FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third effect mode is substantially the same as the fourth effect mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches in a state where the decorative patterns are being scrolled and displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed display is stopped. The display speed of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, thereby improving the visibility of each decorative pattern. (See FIG. 39(B)).

Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are all temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the action of stopping the fluctuation of the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the ornamental symbols that were temporarily displayed in each ornamental symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed, and the active display 002SG103 is erased. (See Figure 39(C)).

In this way, in the low base state, depending on the number of pending memories (for example, when the number of pending memories is 2 or less and a variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the decorative pattern is temporarily changed by the variation stop action. While it is possible to improve interest by adding variation to the movement when the display is stopped, there are cases where the number of pending memories is 3 in the low base state, or when the average variable display period is short and it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative patterns. In this state, if variable display is executed based on the shortened variation pattern regardless of the number of retained memories, the visibility of the decorative pattern will be impaired by temporarily stopping display while maintaining the size without executing the variation stop action. It can be stopped to prevent it from happening.

In this embodiment, data of animations (moving images) of various movements of decorative patterns are, for example, 1. From the start of variable display to the front of high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Low speed variable display ~ variable display stop, 4. It is conceivable to create a video by combining materials for each period, such as stop symbols, but 2. Regarding the high-speed variable display, as shown in FIGS. 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative pattern is high and it is almost transparent, and the high-speed variable display is clearly visible. Even if it can be recognized, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). ). Therefore, even if there is animation data for high-speed variable display for each type of decorative pattern (types depending on which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it does not make much sense and the capacity of the ROM 121 is limited. Therefore, it is preferable that common data be used for the animation data of the high-speed variable display, regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change operation)
Next, an example of the background change operation will be described based on FIGS. 40 and 41. In FIG. 40, (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the first production mode, the first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)), which represents the scenery of the city seen from a distance in the daytime, and the scenery of the city in the daytime, are used as the background images. The first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing the first predetermined background image can be switched and displayed. Switching of the background image is executed when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when a SP reach deviation occurs) is satisfied. In this embodiment, SP reach is executed at a predetermined timing in the next variable display after the SP reach (for example, at the start of the variable display).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the first effect mode, the display is switched between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, although not particularly illustrated, three or more types of background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A may be switched and selectively displayed. Furthermore, the establishment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, but also when a specific effect other than SP reach is executed, when one background image is continuously displayed for a predetermined period, or when the player This may also be true when the selection is made through an operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be before the decorative pattern reaches the reach state. , any timing in the variable display period may be used.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), when the first background image 002SG081 is switched to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when the first background image 002SG081A is switched to the first background image 002SG081), Fade-out display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 displayed with 100% opacity is gradually increased and erased, while the first predetermined background image 002SG081 is hidden with 0% opacity. A fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the background image 002SG081A is gradually reduced. In other words, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1) . The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), from the state in which the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the transmittance (transparency) increases with the passage of time and becomes difficult to see. (See FIG. 41(B)), the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the lower layer of the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and it gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 41(B)). 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see FIGS. 41(D) and (E)), and eventually the transparency of the first background image 002SG081 increases. On the other hand, the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and becomes easier to see (see FIG. 41(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period, but the present invention is not limited to this, only a part of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may be started after the fade-out display period A1 ends. May be started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in fade-out display or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate, for example. , the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in the first period, and then rapidly increase or decrease in the second period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mode in which background images are switched and displayed in one production mode (for example, the first production mode or the second production mode) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even when the first background image corresponding to the first production mode is switched and displayed to the second background image corresponding to the second production mode, the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display of the second background image It is also applicable to those in which the period is synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, an example of the operation of each part in variable display in each production mode will be explained based on FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first production mode. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the second production mode. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first production mode, (B) the second production mode, and (C) the third production mode and the fourth production mode. .

(1st production mode)
As shown in FIG. 42, in the first production mode, when the number of pending memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small symbols were variably displayed at high speed, and a variation start action was performed in the order of the ornamental symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scrolling display of decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is set at the start of the variable display. A fade-out display in which the transparency (transparency) gradually increases is started, while a fade-in display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque is started.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

In addition, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded-in is from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. The period is longer than the fade-in display period B21 (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

Further, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are colored white, A light emission pattern of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Furthermore, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 43, in the second production mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the fluctuation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A22 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is set at the start of the variable display. A fade-out display in which the transparency (transparency) gradually increases is started, while a fade-in display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque is started.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols is ended and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the scroll display of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started until the display becomes high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A22). By doing this, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display disappears suddenly the shorter the period of time it is executed. With regard to the fade-out display that may be executed at different times (e.g., when the background image is faded out), attention should be paid to the fact that the fade-out display of the decorative design is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background image, which means that the variable display of the decorative design has started. be able to.

In addition, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded-in is from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. The period is longer than the fade-in display period B22 (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). By doing this, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display appears suddenly the shorter the period of time it is executed. Regarding the fade-in display that may be executed at certain times (e.g., when the background is fade-in), please note that the variable display of the decorative pattern ends when the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background. can be done.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode (fade-out display period A21 <Fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B)). By doing this, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of scrolling display of decorative patterns different from that in the first presentation mode, but also the scrolling display starts and then becomes a high-speed display, so that the decorative patterns can be visually recognized. Since the fade-out display period A22 until the display becomes difficult becomes longer, attention can be drawn to the decorative pattern for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable display of the decorative pattern in the second performance mode, a special variable display that is different from the first scroll display that moves linearly from the top to the bottom in the first performance mode, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the second scroll display moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first scroll display The special variable display, which is different in aspect from the above, is not only the one that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side as described above, but also, as explained in the first modification, Various scroll displays are applied, such as those that move the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, and those that move in a straight line or curved manner from the bottom to the top. Good too.

In addition, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 are different between the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first production mode and the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second production mode. different. By doing this, since the fade-out display period is the same even though the performance modes are different, it is possible for the player to predict that the determined fluctuation pattern is the non-reachable fluctuation pattern PA1-1. This makes the game more difficult, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 during which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling and display at high speed. In other words, because the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time (for example, at the start of variable display), it becomes difficult to understand that the variable display of decorative symbols has started. can be prevented. Specifically, when the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 disappear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. By erasing the decorative pattern, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

In addition, during the fade-in display period B1 in which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is fade-in displayed, and in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, from when the display speed starts to decelerate until when the display is temporarily stopped. is different from the fade-in display period B22, that is, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time (for example, when the variable display stops, etc.). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that variable display has started. Specifically, when the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A appear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has been stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

Further, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are colored white, A light emission pattern of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Furthermore, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(3rd and 4th production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, in the third production mode and the fourth production mode, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without performing a variation start action. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all gradually decelerate all at once to a low-speed display, and the transmittance decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) also decreases, causing the image to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. That is, the variable stop action and loop action such as in the first performance mode and the second performance mode are not executed, and the variable display ends as it is, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together with the small symbols. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the rotating display is executed in the third production mode or the scroll display is executed in the fourth production mode. Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode (fade-out Display period A23<fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45(A) to 45(C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b control the rhythm, melody, and meter of the high-bass music based on the light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. The light is emitted according to the output of the Also, high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the high base state, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the high base music pattern. , a form in which the light is emitted in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, time signature, etc. of a high bass song has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)), the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is repeatedly executed, and the background BGM is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It may also be output. By doing so, the light emission control of the effect control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Example of operation of customer waiting demonstration production)
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be explained based on FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a starting prize occurs during the customer waiting demonstration performance.

As shown in FIG. 46, the "customer waiting demo performance" is a performance that notifies customers that they are in a customer waiting (playing standby) state. This is an effect that is started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, after the initial operation of the movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. is executed in the initial operation control process when the power is turned on, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 46(A)). When a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without any variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/volume/light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is hidden, and the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is is displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance begins (see FIG. 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demonstration performance, after a video is displayed that sequentially introduces multiple ally characters (which may include images of enemy characters) and content that appear in various performances (Fig. 46 (B) ~ (E)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the production position while the image of allied characters gathered remains displayed (see Fig. 46(F)), and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, moves up to the origin position. (See FIGS. 46(G) to (H)), the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 46(I)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect is completed, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 46(J)).

Note that when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without any variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration performance ended, the customer waiting demonstration performance is started again. Even after that, the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed periodically as long as the waiting state continues. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the performance mode of the customer waiting demonstration performance as the waiting performance is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIGS. 46(B) to 46(H)), the small symbols are continuously displayed in a stopped state in the display area 5S, while the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Decorative designs are not displayed on 5R. In this way, by displaying the small symbols even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can be made aware that the variable display is in a stopped state.

An example of the operation when a starting prize occurs while such a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the first start winning occurs (the variable display start condition is met) while the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 47(B), , While the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is being displayed, variable display of small symbols is started in the display area 5S.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . In addition, the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) of the first pending display 002SG101 from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F is started, and the movement start action of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is moved to the left, Starts from right to center.

As shown in FIG. 47(D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed, as shown in FIG. 47(E), the decoration of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R The symbols move upward in order, the fluctuation start action ends, and scrolling display starts (see FIG. 47(F)).

In this way, if a starting prize occurs while the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols starts before the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then After the demo production image 002SG400 is hidden and the background image corresponding to the production mode at that time (in this case, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first production mode) is displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed. Scroll display starts.

In other words, if the scrolling display of decorative symbols starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has started with the occurrence of the first starting prize, so the small symbols While starting the variable display of the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, the scrolling display is started after the shift display of the hold display ends. The player can be made aware that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first starting prize. On the other hand, when switching the display from the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081 and starting the scroll display after the shift display ends, there is a large time lag from the occurrence of the first starting prize to the start of the scroll display. Therefore, since the variable display of the small symbols starts before the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46(A), (I), and (J), after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the state is in the first production mode or the second production mode, the loop action of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed (see Fig. 23(C)) is executed, and the main lamp 9a, frame Loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) is executed in the lamp 9b and the movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode, the loop action of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 23(C)) is not executed, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable lamp At 9d, light emission control is performed in accordance with the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music.

In this way, in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, making it possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern. In other words, while it is possible to promote the restart of the game, in the high base state, neither the loop action of the decorative symbol nor the loop light emission control is executed, so the production during the high base (third production mode and fourth production mode) This can draw attention to the fact that it is being executed. It is not necessary to perform the loop action of the decorative pattern in the first performance mode or the second performance mode, or it is possible to perform the loop action of the decorative pattern in the third performance mode or the fourth performance mode.

In addition, the reason why the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state is that it is unlikely that the player will end the game in the high base state, and it is likely that the player is simply away from the game. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko game machine 1 is in a non-operating state with no variable display, and by appealing with a loop action, other players can avoid accidentally sitting down. suppressed.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses on "movement", but for example, actions such as changing the position of a decorative pattern, swinging, or deforming are not performed. However, it may be possible to perform an animation such as moving and displaying a highlight on the decorative pattern while the display is stopped and flashing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, fourth background image 002SG084, character images, and other performance images (not shown) that are displayed as background images in the high bass state are adjusted to match the high bass music. Alternatively, an animation may be displayed, such as a background image moving at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is not executed, but the animation display continues for the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084. You can also do this.

(Example of operation of pseudo-continuation notice)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive notice will be explained based on FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of a pseudo consecutive notice. In FIG. 49, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number display and symbol color, (B) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number display and the type of symbol color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number display color determination table. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the "pseudo consecutive notice", after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display is stopped. This is an effect that incites whether or not it will be restarted, that is, whether or not to make one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), the pseudo continuous notice is divided into two types: a "pseudo continuous single pattern" in which the total number of variable displays is two times with the first variable display and one re-variable display, and the first variable display and two variable displays. It is possible to execute a "pseudo-continuation pattern of two times" in which the total number of variable displays is three times, and if the super reach (pseudo-continuation of one time) variation pattern is selected. The "pseudo repeat pattern once" is executed, and if the variation pattern of super reach (pseudo repeat twice) is selected, the "pseudo repeat pattern twice" is executed. It should be noted that the expectation level of jackpot is higher for the ``pseudo consecutive 2-time pattern'' than for the ``pseudo consecutive 1-time pattern''.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(A), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive notice is executed is started, the left decorative symbol display area is A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a ready-to-reach state. Afterward (see FIG. 48(B)), the pseudo-reckon pattern with the characters "NEXT!" ).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and the first variable display is performed again. In other words, a pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the second variable display is started is displayed above the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(F)). , the variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, middle ornamental symbol display area 5C, and right ornamental symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 48(G)). In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive notice is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes through the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C, and one of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C is displayed. Decorative symbols with large numbers are displayed in a static manner, and the variable display result of the failure is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 48(G), in the case of a pseudo-continuous notice of the "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern", after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols is variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. The decorative pattern that had been displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48(L)), and the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern that was temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. This becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 48(M)), and develops into an SP reach effect.

In addition, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed in FIG. 48(G), in the case of a pseudo continuous notice of the "pseudo continuous pattern", the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then , A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and after reaching the reach state again, the words "NEXT!" are displayed on the surface. The pseudo connected pattern on which is displayed is decelerated and displayed before the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(I)), and the second variable display is started, that is, the third variable display is started. After the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 of “×3” indicating that the display has started is displayed above the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48 (J)), the left decoration pattern display area 5L, the center decoration The variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in the symbol display area 5C and the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 48(K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48(L)), and the decoration with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed. The symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R to become a ready-to-reach mode (see FIG. 48(M)), which develops into an SP ready-to-reach effect.

The pseudo-repeat notice includes an introductory part as a period to incite whether or not the variable display will be resumed (Fig. 48 (A) to (C), (G), (J), (K), (L)). ), and a result notification part (see FIGS. 48(D) to (F), (H), (I), and (M)) as a period for notifying the result of whether variable display has been restarted or not. .

As shown in FIG. 49 (B1), in the pseudo consecutive announcement, after the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, when the variable display is restarted, the variable display is restarted. A pseudo-repeat number display is displayed that allows you to specify the number of times the Specifically, the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 (FIG. 48 (F) (G) (see Figure 48 (J) (K) ) is displayed.

The pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49 (B1) and the pseudo continuous number display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes in red. Further, as explained with reference to FIG. 19, normal symbols made of even numbers are colored "blue", and probability variable symbols made of odd numbers are colored "red". The display color for displaying the number of pseudo consecutive times is determined in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 in the variable display number setting process described with reference to FIG. Ru.

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, when the variable display result is "probable variable jackpot", the color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 and Display colors that are non-identical (for example, the pattern color is blue, the pseudo-sequence number display color is red/the pattern color is red, and the pseudo-sequence number display color is blue) are determined at a rate of 10%, and determined in step 002SGS276. A display color that is the same color as the pattern color of the decorated decorative pattern (for example, the pattern color and the pseudo-sequence number display color are blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-sequence number display color are red) is determined at a ratio of 90%.

In addition, when the variable display result is "non-probable variable jackpot", the display color is different from the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, the symbol color is blue, the pseudo consecutive number display color is Red/design color is red, pseudo consecutive number display color is blue) is determined at a ratio of 30%, and the display color is the same as the design color of the decorative design determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, the design color and the pseudo consecutive number display color are blue). The consecutive number display color is blue/the symbol color and the pseudo consecutive number display color are red) at a ratio of 70%.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, the symbol color is blue and the pseudo consecutive number display color is red/ The symbol color is red and the pseudo consecutive number display color is blue) at a rate of 90%. The display color is blue/the symbol color and the pseudo consecutive number display color are red) at a ratio of 10%.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive notice, there are cases where the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and cases where the display color of the temporarily stopped displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo continuous number display are the first combination of non-identical colors. There are cases where the display color becomes a second combination of the same color, and the case where the variable display is restarted with the second combination is better than the case where the variable display is restarted with the first combination in the pseudo-continuation notice. The percentage of games that are controlled to a jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, as the pseudo series number display for the first pseudo series and the second pseudo series, The rate at which the same color blue is determined is higher than the rate at which the non-identical color red is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the pseudo consecutive number display for the first pseudo consecutive and the second pseudo consecutive is displayed in the same color. The rate at which a certain blue color is determined is lower than the rate at which a non-identical color, red, is determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, when the variable probability symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo series for the first pseudo series and the second pseudo series is displayed in the same color. The rate at which a certain red color is determined is higher than the rate at which a non-identical color, blue, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the variable probability symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo series for the first pseudo series and the second pseudo series is displayed in the same color. The rate at which a certain red color is determined is lower than the rate at which a non-identical color, blue, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49 (B1)), the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 is " For the first pseudo-run, which is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) where the temporarily stopped display and the number and display color of the pseudo-run count display 002SG212 are the same type of blue. This is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern and the number in the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are the same type, but the display color is different red. .

In addition, for the second pseudo series where pseudo series number display 002SG213 is "x3", the number of pseudo series number display 002SG212 is different from the temporarily stopped decorative symbol, but the display color is the same type of blue. The 3rd combination ("x3", blue) is better than the 4th combination ("x3", red) in which the numbers and display color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 are different red. determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo consecutives for the first pseudo consecutive and second pseudo consecutive is displayed. , the rate at which the same color blue is determined is lower than the rate at which the non-identical color red is determined.

In the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, when the variable probability symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo series where the pseudo series number display 002SG212 becomes "x2" The numbers of the temporary stop display and the number of pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 are different, but the third combination ("x2", red) whose display color is the same type of red is the temporary stop display. It is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative pattern, the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, and the display color are different blue.

In addition, for the second pseudo series where pseudo series number display 002SG213 is "x3", a second combination ("x 3", red) is better than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 numbers are the same type, but the display color is different blue. determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo consecutives for the first pseudo consecutive and second pseudo consecutive is displayed. , the rate at which the same color blue is determined is lower than the rate at which the non-identical color red is determined.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the numbers of the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212, 002SG213 are the same type, and the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are different. There are cases where the first combination becomes the first combination, and cases where the second combination where both the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern and the number and display color of the pseudo-sequence display are the same type, and the first combination is displayed in the pseudo-sequence notice. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is restarted using the second combination than when the variable display is restarted using the second combination. In addition, when the game is executed, attention can be drawn to the combination of the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the rate of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo consecutives is determined as the variation pattern than when the super reach variable pattern of one pseudo consecutive is determined. , the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed during the second pseudo-run than the case where the second combination of the same kind of decorative pattern, the numbers and display color of the number of pseudo-runs displayed, and the number and display color displayed in the first pseudo-run. By making the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state higher when both the numbers and the display color of the number of pseudo series display are the same type of second combination, the number of executions of the pseudo series and the number of pseudo series executions are increased. It is possible to draw attention to the number displayed by the number of times and the color displayed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run and the number and display color of the pseudo-run number display are the same type of second combination, the decorative pattern becomes a variable pattern, so the pseudo-variable pattern is The ratio of being controlled to a probability-variable jackpot game state may be higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo consecutive runs is determined than when the super reach variation pattern of one consecutive series is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is determined to be one of a plurality of colors according to the number of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display color for displaying the pseudo consecutive number may be a predetermined display color for each pseudo consecutive number, but is not limited to this.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212, 002SG213, "x2" or "x3" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212, 002SG213 is The consecutive number display can be changed in various ways as long as the pseudo consecutive number can be specified, such as "nth consecutive" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth", "nth revariation". It can be displayed in various ways such as.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the number of the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo continuous number display are of the same type and the same color only when the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop is the same type and the same color. is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the number of pseudo consecutive display is 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and the temporary stop display is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo consecutive number display is 002SG212 ("x2", blue) There were two patterns for the number of times display 002SG213 (×3, red), but in addition to the above, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is a normal symbol (“4”, green), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display (×4 , green) may be available, and the numerical color of the decorative pattern, the numerical color of the pseudo consecutive number display, and the pseudo consecutive number can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo continuous notice, even when the number of the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of pseudo continuous number display, the pseudo continuous Decide whether or not to make the consecutive number display color the same as the number of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern. If the same color is decided, the expectation level is higher than if it is decided to be a non-identical color. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases, a predetermined display color (for example, white) may be uniformly determined without determining the display color of the number of pseudo consecutive runs.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo-continuation announcement, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the reach state is reached. After that, the pseudo continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and the re-variable display is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-coupling pattern can be changed in various ways. In addition, after a decorative pattern with a number different from the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the left decorative pattern display area 5L or the right decorative pattern display area 5R is displayed. The re-variable display may be started by temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous decorative pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C.

It should be noted that the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo-continuous notice do not necessarily have to be the same as the fixed ornamental symbols that are stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Further, for example, after a normal symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-run, a probability variable pattern, that is, a different symbol from the first pseudo-run, may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run. Further, the number of times of pseudo series is not limited to the above two times, and pseudo series (re-variable display) may be executed three or more times.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of reach performance. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following FIG. 50. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. Note that although an example of the operation of the ready-to-reach effect in the first effect mode will be described below, a similar ready-to-reach effect may also be executable in the second to fourth effect modes.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), when the variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern is started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L is The decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 50(B)), and then the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 50(C)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. Furthermore, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the loop light emission control described above (see FIG. 24(B)).

In addition, in FIGS. 50(B) and (C), the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this. , decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed simultaneously in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 50(D), when the ready-to-reach effect is started, the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the middle ornamental symbol is displayed. A reach line effect display 002SG250 as a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative pattern (almost transparent and invisible) that is being variably displayed in the area 5C, and the reach line suggestion performance is started. Reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol is displayed on the reach line. This is a display that suggests that the decorative pattern in area 5C will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 50(D), for the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, only the character in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged, like the above-mentioned fluctuation stop action. Rather than being displayed, a number display section 002SG051, a character display section 002SG052, an information display section 002SG053, and a pedestal display section 002SG054 forming a decorative pattern are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this way, by providing the enlarged display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display has not been stopped but has entered the ready-to-reach mode.

When the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 50(D), the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed in a small size near the stop position in the middle ornament symbol display area 5C so as to be superimposed on the ornament symbol that is being variably displayed. After that, it is gradually extended linearly toward the stop position (left and right direction) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see FIG. 50(E)), and after reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 50 (F)), the aspect changes so that the vertical dimension expands (see Fig. 50 (G)), the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to fade-out display (see Fig. 50 (H)), and the final It is erased and becomes hidden (see FIG. 51(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 50(F), in the reach line suggestion production, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge display), and also change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250. By turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B placed around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 while changing the display screen, the area around the display screen becomes darker than usual. , the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(D), after the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are enlarged, the left ornamental symbol is moved to the left, and the right ornamental symbol is The decorative patterns start moving toward the right, that is, in the direction of moving away from each other (see FIG. 50(E)). In addition, the display rotates by a predetermined angle around the rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction while being separated from each other (see Fig. 50 (F)), and the movement and rotation display ends when the farthest separated position on the left and right sides of the display screen is reached. A temporary stop is displayed (see FIG. 50(G)).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed in the left and right separated positions while being enlarged are reduced and rotated while being displayed from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. moved and restored to its normal display position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), when the decorative symbols are restored in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and becomes hidden, it is variably displayed in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C. As the scroll display speed gradually decreases, the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fade-in (see Figures 51 (J) to (K)). The ratio is 0% (opaque), and scrolling display is performed at a low speed (see FIG. 51(L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing the reach line suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R. , and a spaced display in which the decorative pattern is spaced apart after the enlarged display is executed. Since the second period te1 is longer (td1<te1), the player can recognize the decorative symbols forming the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to the original figure (td2<tf1 ), it is possible to make the player recognize the decorative symbols that form the ready-to-reach state, and to quickly reduce the size when restoring to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are enlarged, attention is drawn to which ornamental symbol will be stopped and displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C. Since the left and right dimensions are narrowed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the variable display of decorative patterns, a moving display is performed to separate the left and right decorative patterns. Attention can be drawn to the decorative pattern in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified to be displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R to become the ready-to-reach mode, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the same time as the reach mode.

In addition, the movable lamp 9d changes the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light is turned off while changing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light may be turned off at the same time as the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Moreover, the brightness is not limited to being turned off, and may be lowered than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific light emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed is built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5. Although the embodiment in which the movable lamp 9d is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light emitting means may be a lamp provided around the image display device 5 as described above. For example, a plurality of board-side lamps including an attacker lamp 9c provided on a game board, and a main lamp 9a provided on a gaming machine frame 3 are not limited to those provided on a movable body that can be operated. It may also be a frame lamp 9b, etc., and especially if it is a lamp provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made noticeable by turning off the lamp. be able to.

In addition, after executing the reach line effect display 002SG250, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is set to be higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing of setting the second transmittance F2, which has a low transmittance (transparency), is the timing after reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C, so that the variable display in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is set. The decorative pattern inside does not interfere with the display of reach line effect display 002SG250.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C, the transmittance of the decorative pattern in the center decoration pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transmittance F2 almost simultaneously when the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration symbol display area 5C. The transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C.

(Example of operation of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach effect will be explained based on FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect following FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after reaching the reach mode explained in FIG. 50(C), the type of SP reach effect By displaying the reach title display 002SG070 indicating the reach title, the reach title is notified, and the SP reach effect as a notification effect that informs whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, etc.) ) is started (see FIGS. 53(B) and (C)). In the SP reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect. Incidentally, the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Next, from the time when the battle is settled until the predetermined operational validity period has passed, an operation promotion display 002SG071 consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B are displayed. 002SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 53(D)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed, the operation promotion display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden and the process ends. . If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 002SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32B is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production sound effect is output to notify that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 53(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image. , a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. When the jackpot is confirmed, a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device and is displayed in frame from the lower right side of the display screen, then runs towards the left and temporarily appears in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The number display section 002SG051 of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is lit (see FIG. 53(H)).

As shown in FIG. 55(A), a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame displayed by being lit at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 of each symbol is shown in FIGS. 55(B) to (D). The number increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051, and is displayed near the number of the number display section 002SG051. Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 55(D), the flame image that constitutes the specific image 002SG075 is a loop display of three images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C) with different aspects. By doing this, the flame appears to be moving. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the production position, and result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)), in the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 When is displayed, a combination of determined symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the small pattern and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled (see Fig. 53 (E)), After a result display (not shown) indicating that the character has won a battle with an enemy character is displayed, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as a background image in the notification effect. Then, a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 54(O)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(P), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the production position, and result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)), in the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 54(R)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(S), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. When is displayed, a combination of determined symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the small pattern and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(T)).

In this way, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in action on the number display section 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decoration symbol that is displayed after the end of the notification effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect and enlivening it ( (Refer to FIGS. 53(H) and (I)), in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in action on the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern displayed after the end of the notification effect. (See FIG. 54(S)), it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display section 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decorative pattern combination displayed after the end of the SP reach effect. Although the form is exemplified, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied. good.

Furthermore, the motion display of the specific image may include not only the manner in which the flame sways as described above, but also the manner in which the specific image rotates around the number display section 002SG051 or changes in form or display color. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display section 002SG051 by the character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the character 002SG074 can display a specific image without acting on each decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modification of the present invention.

The fluctuation stop action in the embodiment is an enlarged display of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after passing the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern is moved in the opposite direction and restored to the stopped position. It may also be displayed moving like this.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern gradually moves downward in the direction of the white arrow while being displayed as decelerating toward the stop position, and reaches the stop position. When the temporary stop display is performed (see FIG. 56 (A3)), the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the information display section 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped at the stop position, while the number display section 002SG051 and the character display section 002SG052 pass through the stop position. Then, the display continues to move further downward.

At this time, the moving distance L2 from when the number display section 002SG051 passes the stop position until it is temporarily stopped is longer than the moving distance L2 from when the character display section 002SG052 passes the stop position until it is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is larger than L1 (L1<L2).

After that, the number display section 002SG051 and the character display section 002SG052 that have passed the stop position move upward, and while the character display section 002SG052 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A5)), the character display section 002SG052 moves upward. The display unit 002SG052 passes through the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 56 (A6)). In this way, the moving distance L3 from when the numeric display section 002SG051 passes the stop position upward until it is displayed as a temporary stop is as follows: (L3<L2). Finally, the number display section 002SG051 moves downward and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A7)).

Note that the action in which only the character display portion 002SG052 passes through the stop position and moves upward in FIG. 56 (A6) is a rising action that is different from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in FIG. 23 (A). The difference from the start action can be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stop position, it is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing when it reaches the stop position, but after at least a part of the plurality of seed display parts forming the decorative pattern has passed the stop position, it is displayed in the opposite direction. By displaying the display so that it moves to the side and returns to the stop position, it is possible to make it appear as if a part of the display section has passed by with force, thereby creating a sense of reality.

In addition, while the first display section (for example, the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the information display section 002SG053) among the plurality of display sections is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the other second display section (for example, the numeric display section 002SG051) By causing the character display portion 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, it is possible to provide movement while preventing the stop position from becoming unclear. Furthermore, by making the movement distances of one number display section 002SG051 and the other character display section 002SG052 different from each other in the second display section, it is possible to display actions that match the size and appearance of the display section. .

(Modification 3)
Next, Modified Example 3 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 57. FIG. 57 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 3 of the present invention.

In the embodiment, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first performance mode, as shown in FIG. Although the decorative patterns before and after the statically displayed decorative pattern are not displayed temporarily, the present invention is not limited to this. When one of the decorative patterns (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the preceding and following decorative patterns (e.g., decorative pattern "2", decorative pattern "4") The section may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, when any of the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIGS. 57(A) and 57(B)), perform the variable stop action. In this case (see FIGS. 57(C) and (D)), the execution target of the variable stop action is the decorative pattern that is displayed as a temporary stop at the stop position, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop in an area other than the stop position. It is preferable not to execute the fluctuation stop action for decorative symbols.

By doing so, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols, a temporary stop display is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By once enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols that have been displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and to derive missing combinations that originally have no meaning to the player. Even when the decorative symbols are displayed, the player's line of sight can be kept in the area where the decorative symbols are displayed. In addition, when displaying an enlarged display of a temporarily stopped decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative patterns that are not located in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not displayed in an enlarged manner. It is possible to concentrate on the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the load on display control can also be reduced.

In addition, since the loop light emission control is continued even when enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIGS. 42 and 43), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the control of the movable lamp 9d can be simplified. In addition, when a plurality of valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other variations)
In addition, when the variable display mode changes to the ready-to-reach mode and then develops into the SP ready-to-reach effect, the first predetermined operation in which the left and right decorative symbols forming the ready-to-reach mode move to the front side of the display screen, and the back of the display screen. Only the number display section 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach effect is displayed (for example, on the left and right sides of the upper part of the display screen) by a specific action including a second predetermined action of moving to the side. In this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative pattern is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display part 002SG051 and the information display part 002SG053, and when the variable display starts, the number display part 002SG051 is a number different from the scroll display. The information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute the information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed and the information display section 002SG053 may be deleted before the number variation start action is completed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the embodiment, either the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be executed in the low base state, the third effect mode can be executed in the low accuracy high base state, and the fourth effect can be executed in the high accuracy high base state. Although the mode is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types of production modes may be executed in a low base state, or three or more types of production modes may be executed in a high base state. The mode may also be executable.

In addition, in the embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the first scrolling display in the vertical direction, in the second presentation mode, the second scrolling display that curves from the back side to the front side, and in the third presentation mode, the rotating display, and the fourth In the production mode, a form in which the third scroll display in the vertical direction is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of variable display of decorative patterns in each production mode can be changed in various ways. .

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot gaming state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. , a small winning game state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state is defined as a low-accuracy low-base state, and the special states in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than the normal state are defined as a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy low-base state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the normal state may be a low probability state, and the special state may be a high probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), and when the jackpot game ends, the time saving state or the probability variable state is set. Although the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in a state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control to a time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or to be advantageous in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of Pachinko machine 1). The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state that is controlled after a jackpot game is changed to time-saving state A, and the predetermined state is set without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Time saving state B is a time saving state that is controlled based on the number of times variable display has been executed, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time-saving state that is controlled based on what has been done may be called the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the above-mentioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results for winning the time-saving state C are provided, and the control is performed according to the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C. The number of variable display times during which time saving control is performed may be varied.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

As described above, the display control of the moving display of decorative identification information when variable display of specific identification information is being executed has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the validity/invalidity can be determined by using a movable body in the form of the movable body. May be suggested. In this case, a character may be used as a supplement on the image display device to indicate whether or not the content is correct. By doing so, winning and non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner, increasing interest. The specific control will be explained below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 58 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special symbols (also called a special pattern) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 59). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 59), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 58), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 59).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 59).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 59, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 61, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 61 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The production control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 61 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 63 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 64, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 006IW)
Next, the characteristic part 006IW of this embodiment will be explained. In the feature section 006IW, when the display result of the special symbol becomes "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game is controlled to a variable probability state. This variable probability state has an end condition that the special symbol game has been executed a predetermined number of times, and is a so-called variable probability state. In this example, the expression "the lottery result is a win" may be used, but this means that the display result of the special symbol game is a "jackpot", that is, the random value used to determine the display result in the special symbol normal processing. This means that the display result of the special symbol is determined (pre-determined) based on this, and the determined result becomes a "jackpot". In addition, in this example, the expression "the result of the lottery is non-winning" may be used, but this means that the display result of the special symbol game is a "lose", that is, the random value used to determine the display result in the special symbol normal processing. The display result of the special symbol is determined (pre-determined) based on the above, and it means that the determined result is a "loss".

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 006IW. Of these, FIG. 65-1(A) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for failures used in a low probability state. Further, FIG. 65-1(B) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot used in a low probability state. Further, FIG. 65-2(A) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for failures used in a high probability state. Further, FIG. 65-2(B) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot used in a high probability state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-1(A), in the case of a miss in a low probability state, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (long reach), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 65-1(B), when a jackpot occurs in a low probability state, fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (long reach), and fluctuation pattern PB2 -3 (Super Reach A) is determined as one of the fluctuation patterns.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (A), when the deviation occurs in a high probability state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (long reach), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (B), when a jackpot occurs in a high probability state, fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (long reach), and fluctuation pattern PB2 -4 (Super Reach B) is determined as one of the fluctuation patterns.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed, and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of normal reach < long reach < super reach.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 65-1 and 65-2, the types of super reach that can be executed are different in the low probability state and the high probability state, and the fluctuation period (i.e. performance period) is configured to be different. has been done. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by providing variations in the presentation of the performance between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In this example, only super reach A can be executed as a super reach in a low probability state, and only super reach B can be executed as a super reach in a high probability state, but this is not limited to such a configuration. , multiple types of super reach may be possible.

In addition, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, for example, a variable pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed once or multiple times and then a reach effect is performed, and the number of pseudo continuous effects can be changed. The degree of expectation of a jackpot and the rate of development to a super reach with a high degree of expectation may be varied accordingly.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the feature section 006IW will be explained. FIG. 65-3 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 006IWS801).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 006IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). A symbol) is determined, and data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area (step 006 IWS802).

In step 006IWS802, when the production control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating "missing", the production control CPU 120 determines whether the left center right decorative pattern is a completely mismatched missing pattern or the left and right decorative pattern (specifically, the normal color A combination of reach-to-reach symbols in which only the white regular decorative symbols "1" to "6" and "8" to "9" match is determined. In addition, when a display result designation command indicating a "jackpot" is received, the decorative symbols in the middle right of the left (specifically, "1" to "6" and "8" to "9" whose normal color is white) are displayed. Determine the combination of patterns that have all the normal decorative patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern includes super reach (step 006 IWS803). If the variation pattern does not include super reach, the process moves to step 006IWS808.

If the variation pattern includes super reach, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the gaming state is a high probability state (step 006IWS804). If the state is not a high probability state, the process moves to step 006IWS808. Whether or not the game is in a high probability state can be confirmed by, for example, storing information that allows the gaming state to be specified based on the received command, and referring to the information in step 006IWS804.

If it is a high probability state, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the powerful RUSH mode (step 006IWS805). If the current performance mode is the "powerful RUSH mode", it is determined to perform a super reach (powerful RUSH) performance, and the process moves to step 006IWS808. On the other hand, if the current performance mode is not the "powerful RUSH mode", that is, if it is the "pattop attack mode", it is determined to execute the super reach (pattopat attack) performance, and the process moves to step 006IWS808.

In this example, a "powerful RUSH mode" and a "pattopatto attack mode" are provided as production modes when the game is in a high probability state. In addition, the player is configured to be able to decide which production mode to use when the probability is high (details will be explained in the production mode determination process to be described later). In step 006 IWS805, the information stored in the production mode determination process that allows identification of the production mode is referred to to confirm which production mode is set. In this example, the production mode is configured so that it can be selected when the probability state is high, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The production mode is configured to be selectable when the player is in a game state such as a time saving state (low probability/high base state) or a so-called small win rush state (high probability/low base state). It's okay.

In addition, in this example, when in a high probability state, it is possible to perform a super reach (powerful RUSH) performance and a super reach (pat-pat attack) performance as a performance to notify success or failure, and either one can be performed depending on the performance mode. is configured to run.

Furthermore, in this example, the super reach (powerful RUSH) performance and the super reach (pat-pat attack) performance are performances executed based on the same variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern PA2-4 or the variation pattern PB2-4 shown in Figure 65-2 is determined, if the production mode is the powerful RUSH mode, a super reach (powerful RUSH) production is executed, If it is in attack mode, it will perform a super reach (pat-pat attack) effect. Therefore, when the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, and when the super reach (patopato attack) effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, from the start of the variation The period until the end of the fluctuation is the same. Specifically, as shown in Figure 65-2, when a super reach (powerful RUSH) performance or a super reach (patopato attack) performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-4, the fluctuation is performed for 80 seconds. When the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect or the super reach (pat-pat attack) effect is executed based on pattern PB2-4, the duration is 100 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of performances based on the same variation pattern, and it is also possible to impress an announcement using a police lamp (details will be described later) in one of the performances.

In addition, in this example, when in a high probability state, it is configured to execute either a super reach (pattopat attack) performance or a super reach (powerful RUSH) performance depending on the performance mode, and a push button is used for each. The player is prompted to press 31B, and based on the fact that the press operation has been performed (or that the operation promotion period has elapsed), the player is notified of the success or failure. However, for example, the player may be prompted to perform a repeated tap operation instead of a press operation, and an announcement of success or failure may be made based on the fact that the repeated tap operation that satisfies a predetermined execution condition has been performed (or that an action promotion period has elapsed). It may be possible to do so. In this case, for example, by determining either a press operation pattern or a repeated press operation pattern at different rates depending on the fluctuating display results, it is possible to make the expectations different for each pattern and improve interest. can.

It should be noted that a plurality of conditions may be provided for the notification of success or failure regarding the repeated tapping operation (if the condition is not met, the notification of success or failure will not be made until the operation promotion period has elapsed). For example, in a case where the movement promotion period is 4 seconds, the first judgment timing when the remaining period is 3.5 seconds and the first judgment timing when the remaining period is 2 seconds are used to determine whether the condition is met. Three determination timings are provided in advance: a second determination timing and a third determination timing with one second remaining. For example, at the first judgment timing, whether or not the press operation has been performed 30 times is associated as the first judgment condition, and at the second judgment timing, whether or not the press operation has been performed 20 times is associated as the second judgment condition. The third judgment timing is associated with whether or not the pressing operation has been performed five times as the third judgment condition. In the variable display start setting process, if it is determined that the Super Reach (Patopat Attack) effect or the Super Reach (Powerful RUSH) effect is to be performed using a pattern of repeated tapping operations, a lottery will be conducted to decide which judgment timing and conditions will be selected. Decide whether to combine them.

In such a configuration, when an effect is executed with a pattern of repeated hitting operations based on a combination of the first judgment timing and the first judgment condition, after the start of the movement promotion period, the second judgment period with 3.5 seconds remaining will be executed. It is determined whether the press operation has been performed 30 times at one judgment timing, and if the press operation has been performed 30 times, it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied and a notification of validity is made. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed 30 times at the first judgment timing, a notification of success or failure is not made at the first judgment timing, and a notification of success or failure is made at the timing when the operation promotion period has elapsed. Further, for example, when an effect is executed with a pattern of repeated press operations based on a combination of the second judgment timing and the second judgment condition, a press operation is performed at the second judgment timing when there are two seconds remaining after the start of the movement promotion period. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation has been performed 20 times, and if the pressing operation has been performed 20 times, it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied and a notification of success or failure is made. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed 20 times at the second judgment timing, a notification of success or failure is not made at the second judgment timing, and a notification of success or failure is made at the timing when the operation promotion period has elapsed. Furthermore, for example, when an effect is executed with a pattern of repeated press operations based on a combination of the third judgment timing and the third judgment condition, a press operation is performed at the third judgment timing when the remaining period is 1 second after the start of the movement promotion period. It is determined whether the pressing operation has been performed five times or not, and if the pressing operation has been performed five times, it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied and a notification of success or failure is made. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed five times at the third judgment timing, a notification of success or failure is not made at the third judgment timing, and a notification of success or failure is made at the timing when the operation promotion period has elapsed.

With regard to the selection of combinations of judgment timing and judgment conditions regarding the continuous hitting operation, for example, by determining different ratios depending on the variable display results, the expectations can be made different and the interest can be improved. Hereinafter, regarding the repeated hitting operation, satisfying the determination condition at the determination timing will also be referred to as the repeated hitting operation satisfying the execution condition, or the repeated hitting operation satisfying the execution condition being performed.

In this example, the period during which the player's operation on the push button 31 is effectively detected is referred to as an operation valid period, and the period during which the player is encouraged to perform an operation on the push button 31 is also referred to as an operation promotion period. Furthermore, in this example, the operation promotion period starts at the start of the operation validity period, and ends at the end of the operation validity period, so the operation validity period and the operation promotion period can be read interchangeably. However, this configuration is not limited to this configuration. For example, the operation promotion period starts after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the operation effective period, and the operation promotion period starts after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the end of the operation effective period. ) may be such that the motion promotion period ends before the end of the period. In this case, the part that states that the predetermined process is executed when the operation promotion period ends may be read as saying that the predetermined process is executed when the operation validity period ends, or the part that says that the predetermined process is executed when the operation promotion period ends, or the part that says that the predetermined process is executed when the operation promotion period ends, or the part that says that the predetermined process is executed when the operation promotion period ends, or the part that says that the predetermined process is executed when the operation promotion period ends, may be replaced with A predetermined process may be executed at the timing when the promotion period ends.

In step 006IWS808, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the determined content of the performance (step 006IWS808).

Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006IWS809).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 80. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 006 IWS810). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

By executing the process of step 006IWS810, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content decided to be executed is realized.

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 006IWS811).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 006IWS812).

(Production mode determination process)
Next, the production mode determination process executed within the ending production process in the feature section 006IW will be explained. FIG. 65-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the production mode determination process executed in the ending production process.

In the performance mode determination process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current performance mode determination period is in which the player can determine the performance mode by operating the stick controller 31A or push button 31B (step 006 IWS901). . If the performance mode determination period is not in progress, the performance mode determination process is immediately terminated.

If it is during the performance mode determination period, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not an operation on the stick controller 31A is detected (step 006IWS902). When an operation is detected, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image corresponding to the effect mode "powerful RUSH mode" and an image corresponding to the effect mode "pattopat attack mode" displayed on the image display device 5. is selected according to the operation, and the selected image is highlighted (step 006IWS903).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether an operation on the push button 31B has been detected (Step 006IWS904). If an operation is detected, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode corresponding to the selected image highlighted on the image display device 5 (step 006IWS906). In step 006 IWS906, information that can specify the determined production mode is stored. After that, the production mode determination process is ended.

If no operation on the push button 31B is detected, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is the end timing of the performance mode determination period (step 006IWS904). If it is not the end timing, the production mode determination process is ended, and if it is the end timing, the production mode corresponding to the selected image highlighted on the image display device 5 is determined (step 006IWS906), The production mode determination process ends.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the effect will be explained with reference to the drawings. First, the super reach (battle) effect executed in the low probability state will be explained with reference to FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13. Note that in both figures, the screen changes in ascending order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Super reach (battle) performance executed in low probability state)
FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of super reach (battle) executed in a low probability state. Of Figures 65-5 to 65-13, in Figures 65-5 to 65-9 and Figures 65-11 to 65-13, the effects are executed based on the fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (Super Reach A) jackpot. This is a specific example of a case where Of FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13, FIGS. 65-5 to 65-7 and FIG. 65-10 are specific examples in which the effect is executed based on variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A). It is.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13, after a missed symbol ("327") is displayed as the display result of the previous variation display on the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-5 (1)), the variation pattern PB2-3 (Super Reach A) jackpot or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach A) starts displaying fluctuations based on the loss (FIG. 65-5 (2)).

Next, when the left and right decorative patterns are "2" and the reach state is reached (FIG. 65-5 (3)), the normal reach effect in which the middle decorative pattern scrolls at a low speed is executed, and then the image display device 5 whites out. , the development preview performance is started (Figure 65-5 (4)).

In the development preview performance, first ally character image 006IWC01 appears (Fig. 65-5 (4)), and then a performance display in which second ally character image 006IWC02 appears is performed (Fig. 65-5 (5)). . Next, an effect display is performed in which the characters "Development" are displayed superimposed on the first ally character image 006IWC01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 (FIG. 65-5 (6)). Next, the first mini-character image 006IWC04 is displayed so as to multiply, superimposed on the first ally character image 006IWC01, the second ally character image 006IWC02, and the word "Development" (Fig. 65-5 (7)). An effect display is performed in which the multiplied first mini-character images 006IWC04 are displayed to fill the screen (FIG. 65-5 (8)).

After that, when the super reach (battle) starts, the proliferated first mini-character image 006IWC04 gradually disappears (Figure 65-6 (9)), and an effect display in which all the first mini-character images 006IWC04 eventually disappear is performed (Figure 65-6 (10)). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort when switching from the development preview performance video to the super reach video, and to make the series of flow from the development preview performance to the super reach video appear natural.

Next, an effect display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 appears to land on the ground (FIG. 65-6 (11)), and the upper body of the second ally character image 006IWC02 is enlarged and the second ally character image 006IWC02 A background image including a plurality of star shapes corresponding to is displayed (FIG. 65-6 (12)).

Next, the second ally character image 006IWC02 and the enemy character image 006IWC11 face each other, and the characters "VS" indicating that a battle has started are displayed (FIG. 65-6 (13)).

Next, an effect display is performed in which the enemy character image 006IWC11 attacks the second ally character image 006IWC02 (specifically, a light beam is output from the fingertip) (FIG. 65-6 (14)). At this time, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is in a state where it uses the center decoration pattern "9" (or the pattern image corresponding to the center decoration pattern "9") as a shield to prevent attacks (Figure 65-6 (14) ).

In this example, the decorative patterns are displayed in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", and after "9", the decorations are displayed again from "1". They shall be displayed in order. In the examples shown in Figures 65-5 to 65-12, the left and right decorative patterns are "2" and are in a reach mode, so the middle decorative pattern "9" displayed in Figure 65-6 (14) is This is the middle decoration pattern displayed two places before the middle decoration pattern ``2'', which is the jackpot pattern combination ``222''.

Next, an effect display is performed in which an attack from the enemy character image 006IWC11 to the second ally character image 006IWC02 (specifically, a ray of light output from the fingertip) destroys the center decoration pattern "9" that was serving as a shield. At this time, the center decoration pattern "9" is in a destroyed state (FIG. 65-6 (15)). Then, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is enlarged and displayed, and a background image including a plurality of star shapes corresponding to the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed (FIG. 65-6 (16)).

Next, an effect display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 starts attacking (specifically, attacking) the enemy character image 006IWC11 (FIG. 65-7 (17)). Then, the opposing enemy character image 006IWC11 is displayed from the front (Fig. 65-7 (18)), and an effect display is performed in which a center decoration pattern "1" appears in front of the enemy character image 006IWC11 (Fig. 65-7 (18)). 19)). Then, this center decoration pattern "1" becomes a shield that prevents the second ally character image 006IWC02 from attacking the enemy character image 006IWC11, that is, the second ally character image 006IWC02 attacks this center decoration pattern "1" (specifically 65-7 (20)).

Note that the center decoration pattern "1" displayed in FIG. 65-7 (19) is the center decoration pattern displayed one place before the center decoration pattern "2" which is the jackpot pattern combination "222". Therefore, when the center decoration symbol "1" displayed in FIG. 65-7 (19) is destroyed and the next center decoration symbol "2" is displayed, a jackpot is announced.

When the attack by the second ally character image 006IWC02 reaches the center decoration symbol "1" (Figure 65-7 (20)), the effect image that was displayed until just before is displayed with reduced brightness and saturation. , a cut-in effect is executed in which the ally character image 006IWC01 and an image depicting a plurality of star shapes (with normal or high brightness or saturation) are displayed in a superimposed manner (FIG. 65-7 (21)). When the image displayed by the cut-in effect is erased, the same effect display as that immediately before the cut-in effect (FIG. 65-7 (20)) is performed again (FIG. 65-7 (22)).

At this point, the decision button effect is started, and a push button image 006IWG03 imitating the push button 31B and a display indicating the operation validity period are displayed superimposed on the effect display that was displayed until just before (Fig. 65-7 (23) )). That is, an effect display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is started.

Variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach A) In the case of a jackpot, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, a radial pattern background image is displayed on the image display device 5 after FIG. 65-7 (23). (FIG. 65-8 (24)), and a movable body performance is executed in which the movable body 32 moves from the initial position to the performance position in front of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-8 (25)). Next, the movable body 32 stops for a predetermined period at the presentation position in front of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-8 (26)).

After that, the movable body 32 is controlled to return from the production position to the initial position, and the attack from the second ally character image 006IWC02 to the enemy character image 006IWC11 becomes effective, and the center decoration pattern "1" that was a shield is destroyed. At the same time, an effect display is performed in which the attacked enemy character image 006IWC11 is blown away (FIG. 65-8 (27)).

Next, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a jubilant manner (FIG. 65-8 (28)), and then the previous effect display including the second ally character image 006IWC02 and enemy character image 006IWC11 (FIG. 65-8 (28)) is displayed. 28)) A light effect image is displayed superimposed on the image (FIG. 65-8 (29)), and the light effect image is enlarged to display an effect that covers the second ally character image 006IWC02 and the enemy character image 006IWC11. (Figure 65-8 (30)). At this time, since the light effect image is non-transparent, the covered second ally character image 006IWC02 and enemy character image 006IWC11 are not visible.

Next, after the light effect image covers the entire screen, an effect display is performed in which the jackpot symbol "222" including the center decoration symbol "2" displayed in the normal manner appears (FIG. 65-8 (31)). . Then, the jackpot symbol "222" is gradually enlarged and displayed (FIG. 65-9 (32)) and enlarged to cover the entire screen (FIG. 65-9 (33)). Thereafter, the jackpot symbol "222" is displayed in the same size as when the normal fluctuation was being performed before the reach is established, and is displayed as if shaking four times (FIG. 65-9 (34)).

Next, an effect display is performed in which the jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily hidden and the characters "Complete Settlement" are displayed (FIG. 65-9 (35)). Then, the image display device 5 whites out, the super reach (battle) effect ends, and the same background image as when the normal variation before reaching is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily displayed. It is stopped and displayed (Figure 65-9 (36)). After that, the jackpot symbol "222" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-9 (37)). Note that in this example, the temporary stop display is not a mode in which the display is completely stopped, but a mode in which the display is displayed while shaking slightly.

If the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A) is off, the attack from the second ally character image 006IWC02 to the enemy character image 006IWC11 will not be effective and will become a shield after Figure 65-7 (23). An effect display is performed in which the inner decoration pattern "1" changes from the cracked state to the normal state again without being destroyed (FIG. 65-10 (38)).

Next, the enemy character image 006IWC11 in a pose with both hands raised diagonally is displayed (Figure 65-10 (39)), and the center decoration pattern "1" is further displayed superimposed on the enemy character image 006IWC11 (Figure 65-10 (40)). Then, after the middle decoration pattern "1", which is a losing combination, is displayed in a shaking manner four times, the image display device 5 goes black out (Figure 65-10 (41)), and the super reach (battle) effect ends. .

When the super reach (battle) effect ends, the same background image as when the normal fluctuation was performed before the reach is established is displayed, and the losing symbol "212" is temporarily stopped and displayed (Figure 65-10 ( 42)). After that, the missed symbol "212" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-10 (43)).

(Fanfare performance executed in low probability state)
Next, a fanfare performance performed in a low probability state will be explained. FIGS. 65-11 to 65-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of fanfare performances executed in a low probability state. Note that in both figures, the screen changes in ascending order of (1), (2), and (3).

When a jackpot occurs in a low probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. 65-9 (37), after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a fanfare effect is started. In the fanfare performance executed in a low probability state, first, a background image of a radial pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and the words "Right hit" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed at the upper right of the display area. . Then, the character display "B" appears from the upper side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Fig. 65-11 (1)), and then an effect display is performed in which the character display "B" moves to the center of the display area (Fig. 65-11 (1)). 65-11(2)).

Next, the character display "B" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "O" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Fig. 65-11 (3)). Next, when the character display "O" moves to the vertical center of the display area, it subsequently moves to the horizontal center, and the character display "B" is faded out so as to be pushed out from the left part of the display area. is performed (Figure 65-11 (4)).

Next, the character display "O" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "N" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Fig. 65-11 (5)). Next, when the character display "N" moves to the vertical center of the display area, it subsequently moves to the horizontal center, and the character display "O" is faded out so as to be pushed out from the left part of the display area. is performed (Figure 65-11 (6)).

Next, the character display "N" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "U" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Figure 65-11 (7)). Next, when the character display "U" moves to the vertical center of the display area, it subsequently moves to the horizontal center, and the character display "N" is faded out so as to be pushed out from the left part of the display area. is performed (Figure 65-11 (8)).

Next, the character display "U" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "S" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Figure 65-12 (9)). Next, when the character display "S" moves to the vertical center of the display area, it subsequently moves to the horizontal center, and the character display "U" is faded out so as to be pushed out from the left part of the display area. is performed (Figure 65-12 (10)). Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the characters "U" and "S" are successively faded out so as to be pushed out from the left side of the display area (FIG. 65-12 (11)).

Next, on the image display device 5, "ONU" of the character display "BONUS" is enlarged and displayed, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it (FIG. 65-12 (12)). Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the entire character display "BONUS" and a glowing effect image are displayed around it (FIG. 65-12 (13)).

Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed to invert the color of the image being displayed (FIG. 65-12 (14)), and then the color of the image being displayed is inverted again (i.e., restored). An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-12 (15)).

Next, a part of an arrow image imitating a rightward arrow appears from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and is superimposed on the character display "BONUS" (that is, in a layer higher than the character display "BONUS"). , an effect display that moves toward the right side of the display area is performed (FIG. 65-12 (16)). The arrow image is overlaid with the characters "Right-handed", and at the time shown in FIG. 65-12 (16), part of the arrow image and part of the characters "Right-handed" appear.

Next, in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image moves to near the center of the display area (FIG. 65-13 (17)), and when the tip of the arrow image reaches the right end of the display area (FIG. 65-13 (18)) , an effect display is performed that moves toward the left side of the display area as if hitting the right end of the display area and bouncing back (FIG. 65-13 (19)). Thereafter, when the trailing edge of the arrow image reaches the left edge of the display area, an effect display that moves toward the right side of the display area is performed again, and when the tip of the arrow image reaches the right edge of the display area (Fig. 65-13 (20 )), the effect display that moves toward the left side of the display area as if colliding with the right end of the display area and bouncing back is repeated (FIG. 65-13 (21)).

(Ending performance)
Next, the performance performed in the jackpot game state and the ending performance that notifies the end of the jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 65-14 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the ending performance when a jackpot occurs in a low probability state and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In this example, in the jackpot game state, a round (round game) in which the jackpot is opened is executed a plurality of times. When the first round starts, as shown in FIG. 65-14 (1), the first ally character image 006IWC01, the second ally character image 006IWC02, and the third ally character image are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. Image 006IWC03 is displayed, the round display "ROUND1" indicating the current round number is displayed at the top left of the display area, and the text "Right strike" and a right arrow image are displayed at the top right of the display area. At the lower right corner of the area, an effect display is performed in which an acquired point display "00000" indicating points based on the game balls paid out as prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-14 (2), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening and the prize ball is paid out, an effect display is performed in which an acquired point display "00047" is displayed. After that, when the final round ends, as shown in FIG. 65-14 (3), the first ally character image 006IWC01, the second ally character image 006IWC02, and the third ally character image 006IWC03 are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. are displayed holding hands, a round display "FINAL" is displayed at the top left of the display area, and an acquired point display "00440" is displayed at the bottom right of the display area.

In this example, a powerful RUSH mode and a patrol attack mode are provided as performance modes when the game is in a high probability state. When the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, there is a performance mode determination period in which the performance mode can be determined before the end of the jackpot game state, and any performance mode determination period during the performance mode determination period is provided. A performance is performed to determine whether to enter the performance mode.

Specifically, when the final round ends (FIG. 65-14 (3)), the performance mode determination period that is part of the ending performance begins, and as shown in FIG. 65-14 (4), the image display device 5 , the display area becomes dark (for example, the background changes to black) and the words "Select a mode!" are displayed. Furthermore, behind the text display "Select a mode!" (that is, in a lower layer than the text display "Select a mode!"), there is a first production mode image 006IWG03a corresponding to the production mode "Powerful RUSH" and a production display. The second performance mode image 006IWG03b corresponding to the mode "Patopato Attack" is displayed in gray indicating that it is inactive.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-14 (5), the display area of the image display device 5 becomes bright again, and the first production mode image 006IWG03a corresponding to the production mode "Powerful RUSH" and the production mode "Patopato Attack" are displayed. An effect display is performed in which a second effect mode image 006IWG03b corresponding to , and a push button image 006IWG02 are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 65-14 (5), the first effect mode image 006IWG03a is selected between the first effect mode image 006IWG03a and the second effect mode image 006IWG03b, so the first effect is The mode image 006IWG03a is a colorful and enlarged highlighted display indicating a selected state, and the second effect mode image 006IWG03b is a gray display indicating a non-selected state.

Here, when the player performs an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the right, the first performance mode image 006IWG03a becomes gray, indicating that it is in a non-selected state, as shown in FIG. 65-14 (6). The second effect mode image 006IWG03b is displayed in a colorful and enlarged highlighted manner indicating that it is in a selected state. Then, when the player presses the push button 31B, the performance mode "Patopato Attack" corresponding to the currently selected second performance mode image 006IWG03b is determined, and the performance mode determination period ends.

After that, the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed as shown in Figure 65-14 (7), and then the text "Pachinko and Pachislot are games that can be enjoyed in moderation" is displayed as shown in Figure 65-14 (8). is displayed, and the ending effect in the jackpot game state ends.

(Super reach (patopato attack) production)
Next, a description will be given of a super reach (pat-pat attack) performance that is executed as one of the super reach in a high probability state. FIG. 65-15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a patrol lamp used in the super reach (pattopat attack) effect.

FIG. 65-15(A) is a specific example showing a patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and a second ally character image 006IWC02 used in the super reach (pattop attack) effect.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-15(A), a scene is provided in which a police lamp (patrol lamp image 006IWG01) and a character (second ally character image 006IWC02) are in contact with each other. For example, the scenes shown in Figures 65-17 (11) to (12), Figures 65-18 (11) to (12'), Figures 65-19 (14) to (21), and Figure 65-20 (22) are Applicable.

More specifically, the patrol lamp (patron lamp image 006IWG01) is in contact with the character (second ally character image 006IWC02) by the tool (patron lamp string image 006IWG01a). Further, in this example, a scene in which the character (second ally character image 006IWC02) wears the police lamp (patrol lamp image 006IWG01) is provided as a scene in which the police lamp is in contact with the character. For example, the scenes shown in FIG. 65-17 (11) and FIG. 65-18 (11) are applicable.

In this way, in this example, the patrol lamp (patron lamp image 006IWG01) and the character (second ally character image 006IWC02) are in a close relationship, and their production effects are synergistically enhanced.

Furthermore, in this example, a scene is provided in which a police lamp (patramp image 006IWG01) and a character (second ally character image 006IWC02) are in contact with each other, but in order to make it easier for the player to identify them, , so that the color of the police lamp (patron lamp image 006IWG01), the color of the police lamp string (patron lamp string image 006IWG01a), and the hair color of the character (second ally character image 006IWC02) are different from each other (or have different colors). It is configured.

Note that in this example, the character wears a hat-shaped police lamp with a string to represent the state in which the police lamp and the character are in contact. Various forms can be adopted, such as a form in which the character wears a helmet glued to it, or a form in which the character wraps a band around his arm to which a police lamp is glued.

FIG. 65-15(B) is a specific example showing the display mode of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 used in the super reach (pattop attack) effect.

On the left side of FIG. 65-15(B), the police lamp image 006IWG01 is shown in the non-lighting mode (dark red mode), and on the right side of FIG. A police lamp image 006IWG01 is shown. As shown on the left side of FIG. 65-15(B), when the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in an unlit state, it is displayed in a dark red and unlit state. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 65-15(B), when the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode, it is displayed in a mode that shines red and emits light. Furthermore, when the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode for a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIGS. , the direction of light emission is displayed in a rotating manner.

In this example, when Super Reach (Patopato Attack) is executed, the scene before the scene that announces whether it is a jackpot or not (hereinafter, the scene that announces the success or failure is called the announcement scene, and the scene before the announcement scene) In the scene (also referred to as a pre-announcement scene), the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lit state. After the pre-announcement scene, when a jackpot is announced in the announcement scene, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit mode, and when a loss is announced, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lit mode. be done.

Therefore, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown on the right side of FIG. 65-15(B) can be said to be a mode for announcing a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as notification mode); The police lamp image 006IWG01 shown in the non-lit mode can be said to be a mode in which the jackpot is not announced (hereinafter also referred to as a non-announcement mode).

Note that the non-lit police lamp image 006IWG01 does not announce that it is a jackpot, but when it is displayed in the pre-announcement scene, it does not yet announce whether it is a jackpot or a loss. When it is displayed after the announcement scene, it means that it is not a jackpot but a loss.

FIGS. 65-16 to 65-20 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of super reach (pat-pat attack) executed when the probability state is high and the performance mode is "pat-pat attack". Among Figures 65-16 to 65-20, Figures 65-16 to 65-17 (or Figure 65-18) and Figure 65-19 show fluctuations that are out of fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (shortened fluctuations). This is a specific example of a case where the performance is executed based on the variable pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) jackpot after the winning. Among Figures 65-16 to 65-20, Figures 65-16 to 65-17 (or Figure 65-18) and Figure 65-20 show fluctuations that are outside the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (shortened fluctuations). Variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) is a specific example of a case where an effect is executed based on the deviation.

If the performance mode "Patopato Attack" is selected when the jackpot game state ends, the high probability state game starts after the jackpot game state ends, as shown in Figure 65-16 (1). The title of the production mode ``Patopato Attack'' is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 65-16(1), the text "PATPATO ATTACK" is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a plurality of police lamp images are displayed as the background image.

Next, on the image display device 5, the first ally character image 006IWC01 on the right side of the display area and the third ally character image 006IWC03 on the left side of the display area are displayed so as to face each other, and the police lamp image 006IWG01 is located between these characters. An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-16 (2)). Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 65-16 (2), since the upper limit of the number of fluctuations to be controlled to a high probability state is set to 100, the high probability state is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5. The remaining number of fluctuations display "100 times remaining" is displayed, which indicates the number of remaining fluctuations at .

Next, when the variable display of the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation) is started, the decorative pattern at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern at the upper center of the display area are displayed in a variable manner. Display is performed (Figure 65-16 (3)). Then, the decorative pattern at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern at the top center of the display area are displayed in combination with the missed pattern "154" (FIG. 65-16 (4)). At this time, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of fluctuations as "99 times remaining."

Next, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA2-4 (Super Reach B) or the variable pattern PB2-4 (Super Reach B) is started, the police lamp image 006IWG01 swings on the image display device 5, and the first ally character An effect display is performed in which an abnormality is noticed between the image 006IWC01 and the third ally character image 006IWC03 (FIG. 65-16 (5)). Then, on the image display device 5, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is temporarily shrunk (FIG. 65-16 (6)), and an effect display is performed in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 jumps up (FIG. 65-16 (7)). After that, the super reach (pat-pat attack) effect starts, so the effects shown in Figures 65-16 (5) to (7) are effects that suggest that the super reach (pat-pat attack) will be executed. I can say that.

When Super Reach (Patopat Attack) starts, the title is displayed as shown in FIG. 65-17 (8). Specifically, the title display includes a plurality of police lamp images 006IWG01 and a text display of "Patopato" regarding the police lamp, and the text display of "Patopato" regarding the police lamp is displayed larger than the other text display "Push Chance". be done. With such a configuration, the player can be made to strongly recognize the patrol lamp. Note that this is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65-17 (8); for example, only the character display "Patopato" may be displayed with an effect display or operated to be emphasized more than other character displays. You can do it like this.

In this example, at the start of the super reach (pattop attack) that uses the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 to announce success or failure, the decorative pattern does not become a reach mode and is reduced, as shown in Figure 65-17 (8). By keeping the rotated decorative pattern as it is, it is possible to concentrate more on the police lamp image 006IWG01. In addition, in this example, after the jackpot is announced using the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), which will be described later, by showing the pattern alignment in the scenes after FIG. 65-19 (17), It is possible to make step-by-step announcements such as announcing a jackpot using the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and announcing a jackpot based on matching symbols, thereby making it possible to further impress the player with the fact that it is a jackpot.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed (FIG. 65-17 (9)), followed by the falling police lamp image 006IWG01 (FIG. 65-17 (10)), and the falling police lamp image 006IWC02 is displayed (FIG. 65-17 (10)). An effect display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 wears the police lamp image 006IWG01 (FIG. 65-17 (11)).

Next, on the image display device 5, together with the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02, the push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Press!" are displayed as an action promotion display that prompts the player to press the push button 31B. (Figure 65-17 (12)). At this time, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed with an expectant expression.

Here, a modification example in which the push button 31B is required to be repeatedly pressed in the super reach (pattop attack) will be described. FIG. 65-18 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example in which a continuous hitting operation is required in super reach (pat-pat attack). In the modified example shown in FIG. 65-18, the same effect display as in FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (11) is performed for the scenes in FIGS. 65-18 (8) to (11), but ), along with the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02, the push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Continuous Hit" are displayed as an operation promotion display that prompts the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B. An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-18 (12')). At this time as well, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed with an expectant expression.

Note that the police lamp images 006IWG01 shown in FIGS. 65-17 and 65-18 are both in a non-lit state. Furthermore, in the pre-announcement scenes shown in FIGS. 65-17 and 65-18, a background image with a white-based color scheme is used in the image display device 5.

In this example, as shown in Figure 65-17 (12) and Figure 65-18 (12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the text display of "Press!" (or at least a position where a part of the police lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible state). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to both the presence of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the presence of the action promotion display.

Note that when displaying the action promotion display, for example, the police lamp, the character, and the action promotion display may each be operated. FIG. 65-27 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example in which a police lamp image and a push button image are displayed in action. In the example shown in FIG. 65-27, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-18 (12'), the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed moving to the right, and a push button is displayed. The pressed part of the button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a manner that it is not depressed (Fig. 65-27 (1)), and then a motion display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 moves to the left. At the same time, the pressed part of the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a depressed manner (FIG. 65-27 (2)). Then, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed moving to the right again, and the pressed part of the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed without sinking (Fig. 65-27). 3)) Next, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed moving to the left, and the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a sunken state (Fig. 65-27(4)). That is, the motion display in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 move left and right, and the motion display in which the pressed part of the push button image 006IWG02 sinks and returns to its original state, occur after the motion promotion period of the push button 31B has elapsed. repeated until.

In the modification shown in FIG. 65-27, the operation of the push button image 006IWG02, the operation of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01, and the operation of the second ally character image 006IWC02 are displayed so as not to be synchronized. Specifically, the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in such a way that the button part repeats a state in which it is not depressed (FIG. 65-27 (1)) and a state in which it is depressed (FIG. 65-27 (2)), The patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 are displayed so as to repeatedly move to the right (Fig. 65-27 (1)) and left (Fig. 65-27 (2)), and they mutually move. appears to be out of sync. With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

As shown in Figure 65-17 (12) or Figure 65-18 (12'), after the movement promotion display prompting the player to move is displayed, when a predetermined movement is performed (or when the movement promotion period ends) ), when the super reach (pat-pat attack) is executed based on the fluctuation pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) jackpot, the image is enlarged on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13). The police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode. In this scene, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 is not displayed, and only the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode. In this example, from the time when the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed in a lighting mode, to the time when the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 65-19 (21), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Up to this point, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode in which it shines red and the mechanism for emitting light rotates, so that the direction of light emission rotates.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed with a surprised expression (FIG. 65-19 (14)). Also, at this time, in conjunction with the second ally character image 006IWC02 being displayed with a surprised expression, a character voice sound of "ha" with a tone corresponding to the character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, after the scene shown in Figure 65-19 (13) and before the scene shown in Figure 65-19 (14), the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is announced. The expression may be displayed in the same manner as the scene.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the illuminated police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed with a happy expression (FIG. 65-19 (15)). At this time, in conjunction with the display of the second ally character image 006IWC02 with a happy expression, a character voice sound saying "Yay!" in a tone corresponding to the character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the illuminated mode is displayed in a manner that makes a happy action (in this example, an action of jumping with both hands raised) (FIG. 65- 19(16)). Also, at this time, in conjunction with the second ally character image 006IWC02 being displayed in a manner that makes it happy, a character voice sound of "Yay, Yay" with a tone corresponding to the character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Next, on the image display device 5, the jackpot symbol "222" is displayed superimposed on the second ally character image 006IWC02 (Figure 65-19 (17)), and this jackpot symbol "222" is gradually enlarged and displayed (Figure 65-19 (17)). 65-19(18)), and the display is enlarged to cover the entire display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-19(19)). After that, on the image display device 5, the normal size jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-19 (20)), and finally the jackpot symbol "222" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-19 (20)). 21)).

As shown in Figure 65-19, when a jackpot is announced, from the timing of the announcement (Figure 65-19 (13)) until the jackpot symbol "222" is stopped and displayed (Figure 65-19 (21)) ), the police lamp image 006IWG01 is always in a lighting mode and is displayed in such a way that the direction in which it emits light rotates. Furthermore, in the scene where a jackpot is announced as shown in FIG. 65-19, a background image with a red-based color scheme is used in the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 65-17 (12) or Figure 65-18 (12'), after the movement promotion display prompting the player to move is displayed, when a predetermined movement is performed (or when the movement promotion period ends) ), when the super reach (pat-pat attack) is executed based on the deviation of the variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B), as shown in FIG. 65-20 (22), on the image display device 5, The second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the non-lit police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a disappointing manner. At this time, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the non-lit police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a disappointed manner, and a voice corresponding to the character says, ``Okay, let's do our best next time.'' !” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, on the image display device 5, the first ally character image 006IWC01 and the third ally character image 006IWC03 face each other before the super reach (pattop attack) starts, and the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is positioned between these characters. An effect display is performed, and a losing symbol "212" is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols in the lower right part of the display area (FIG. 65-20 (23)). Thereafter, the small symbol "212" is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-20 (24)), and the remaining variation number display "98 times remaining" is displayed in the lower right part of the display area. In the scene shown in FIGS. 65-20 in which the notification of failure is made, a background image with a white-based color scheme is used in the image display device 5.

In this example, in the pre-announcement scene, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lit state (dark red state), and the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a state full of expectation (Fig. 65-17 (12). ), see Figure 65-18 (12')), if the lottery result is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode (red glowing mode) (Figure 65-19 (13)). ), the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy manner (see FIGS. 65-19 (15) and (16)). On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lit mode (dark red mode), and the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a disappointing mode ( (See Figure 65-20 (22)). With such a configuration, winning or non-winning can be clearly communicated by indicating the winner or not in the form of a police lamp and supplementarily changing the display form of the character.

Furthermore, in this example, when the lottery result is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode without displaying the character as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), and then the As shown in 65-19 (14) to (16), the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting manner, and the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy manner. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a non-winner, after the pre-announcement scene, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lit manner as shown in Figure 65-20 (22), and the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed as a regrettable character. Display in a manner that With such a configuration, only the illuminated police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed without displaying the character when announcing the winning, so that the content of the announcement can be made easier to understand.

In this example, if the lottery result is a win, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in the pre-announcement scene after the scene shown in Figure 65-19 (13) and before the scene shown in Figure 65-19 (14). , and then displays the second ally character image 006IWC02 in a surprised expression (FIG. 65-19 (14)), a happy expression (FIG. 65-19 (15)), and a mode in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 performs a happy action. They may be displayed in the order shown in (FIG. 65-19 (16)). With this configuration, the character's facial expression changes to the facial expression that the player wants the player to have, so it is possible to provide an environment in which the player can easily tune in and enjoy the game.

Further, in this example, the background image of the image display device 5 is the first color (in this example, a white-based color scheme) in the pre-announcement scene, and when the lottery result is a winning result, the background image of the image display device 5 is the first color after the pre-announcement scene. If the result of the lottery is a non-winner, a color from the same family as the first color (in this example, a white-based color scheme) will be displayed after the pre-announcement scene. ). With this configuration, winning and non-winning can be easily recognized from the change in background color.

Further, in this example, in the pre-announcement scene, an action promotion display urging the player to take action is displayed at a position where the police lamp image 006IWG01 is visible. Specifically, as shown in Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the text display of "Press!" position (or at least a position where a part of the police lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible state). If the result of the lottery is a win, when the player performs an action during the action promotion period in which the action promotion display is displayed, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting manner. Specifically, when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), or when the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-18 (12'), When a repeated tapping operation that satisfies the execution conditions is performed, the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), and the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state. With this configuration, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by indicating success or failure in the form of a police lamp and supplementarily changing the display form of the character. Furthermore, by displaying the action promotion display in a position where the police lamp can be seen, attention can be drawn to both the presence of the police lamp and the action promotion display.

Further, in this example, the action promotion display includes an image promotion display that imitates an object to perform an action, and a character promotion display using characters. Specifically, as shown in Figure 65-17 (12), Figure 65-18 (12'), and Figure 65-27, it includes a push button image 006IWG02 and character displays such as "Press!" and "Continuously press". . Both the image promotion display and the text promotion display are displayed so as not to completely cover the police lamp. Specifically, as shown in Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the text display of "Press!" and "Continuously press" do not overlap with the police lamp image 006IWG01. position (or a position where at least a part of the police lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible state). With such a configuration, it is possible to always draw attention to the police lamp image 006IWG01.

Further, in this example, a notification sound is output in conjunction with displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode, and then the character's voice is output. Specifically, as shown in Figure 65-19 (13), a notification sound is output in conjunction with displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode, and then as shown in Figures 65-19 (14) to (16). As shown, each character's voice is output in a tone corresponding to the character, such as ``ha'', ``yay'', and ``yay, yay''. With such a configuration, the winning can be made more exciting by sequentially outputting the notification sound and the character's voice.

Further, in this example, when the lottery result is a non-winning result, the sound of the character is output without outputting the sound corresponding to displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a non-lit mode. For example, as shown in Figure 65-20 (22), the sound corresponding to displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a non-lit mode is not output, and a character voice with a tone corresponding to the character says, ``Okay, let's do our best next time!'' Output. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the mode of the police lamp image 006IWG01, that is, whether it is correct or not, depending on whether or not the notification sound is output. In addition, if the player has not won, the announcement sound is not output, but the character's voice is output, thereby avoiding the situation where there is no sound and getting too excited, and reducing player disappointment. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), the period in which the notification sound and the character's voice are output in conjunction with displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting manner is as shown in the figure. As shown in Figure 65-19 (14) to (16), the period is longer than the period in which character voices such as "Ha", "Yay", and "Yay, Yay" are output as the character's voice, and as shown in Figure 65-19 (14). As shown in Figure 65-20 (22), the period for outputting each character's voice such as "hah", "yay", and "yay, yay" in the voice tone corresponding to the character when a jackpot is won is as shown in Figure 65-20 (22). In addition, the period may be set to be longer than the period during which the character voice saying "Good luck, try your best next time!" in a voice tone corresponding to the character when the character misses. With such a configuration, it is possible to appeal the announcement by outputting the announcement sound, and it is possible to make the winning excitement more exciting, and it is also possible to make it possible to understand the mode of the police lamp image 006IWG01, that is, whether it is correct or not, depending on whether or not the announcement sound is output. . In addition, if the player has not won, the announcement sound is not output, but the character's voice is output, thereby avoiding the situation where there is no sound and getting too excited, and reducing player disappointment. .

In this example, after the scene shown in Figure 65-17 (12) or Figure 65-18 (12'), if a super reach (pat-pat attack) that results in a jackpot is executed, the second ally character There is a scene where image 006IWC02 is not displayed and only patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed once, but such a scene is not provided when a super reach (patropat attack) that results in a miss is executed. However, such a scene may be provided, for example, as shown in FIG. 65-40.

FIG. 65-40 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of a police lamp image displayed when a candidate is not elected. In the modification shown in FIG. 65-40, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-17 (12) or FIG. 65-18 (12'), the second ally character image 006IWC02 is not displayed, and the police lamp image 006IWG01 is not lit. only is displayed (Figure 65-40 (1)).

Next, as in FIG. 65-20 (22), the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the non-lit police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a disappointing manner on the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-20). 40(2)). At this time, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the non-lit police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a disappointed manner, and a voice corresponding to the character says, ``Okay, let's do our best next time.'' !” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thereafter, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 65-20 (23) and (24) are executed (FIGS. 65-40 (3) and (4)).

When applying the modified example shown in FIG. 65-40, the size of the police lamp image 006IWG01 is better when it is displayed in a lighting mode. It is larger than when displayed in the lighting mode. Specifically, the police lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) in a lighting state after the winning announcement is better than the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting state after the loss notification shown in FIG. 65-40 (1). Display size is large. In addition, when the lottery result is non-winning, the display is displayed in a non-lit manner after the pre-announcement scene than when it is displayed in a non-lit format in the pre-announcement scene. Specifically, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-announcement mode after failure notification shown in FIG. 65-40 (1) is better than the pre-announcement scene shown in FIGS. 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12'). The display size is larger than that of the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-announcement mode. With such a configuration, the victory can be suitably promoted by making the police lamp that is used to announce the election appear larger. Furthermore, even in the non-lighting mode, when announcing non-winning, the non-winning can be made easier to recognize by making it appear larger than the pre-announcement scene.

(Super reach (powerful RUSH) production)
Next, a super reach (powerful RUSH) effect executed as one of the super reach in a high probability state will be explained.

FIGS. 65-21 to 65-24 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of super reach (powerful RUSH) executed when the state is high probability and the performance mode is "powerful RUSH". If the performance mode "Powerful RUSH" is selected when the jackpot game state ends, when the high probability state game starts after the jackpot game state ends, as shown in Figure 65-21 (1). The title of the production mode "Powerful RUSH" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 65-21 (1), the text "POWERFUL RUSH" is displayed at the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second mini-character image 006IWC05 is displayed at the lower left and lower right of the display area, respectively. has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-21 (2), the background image of the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for powerful RUSH, and a decorative pattern (previous variation display result "222") is displayed in the center of the display area. be done. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 65-21 (2), since the upper limit of the number of fluctuations to be controlled to a high probability state is set to 100, the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5 displays the high probability state. The remaining number of fluctuations display "100 times remaining" is displayed, which indicates the number of remaining fluctuations at .

Next, when the variable display that is out of the variable pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation) is started, the decorative pattern in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern in the upper center of the display area are each displayed in a variable manner. Display is performed (Figure 65-21 (3)). Then, the decorative pattern at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern at the top center of the display area are displayed in combination with the missed pattern "154" (FIG. 65-21 (4)). At this time, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of fluctuations as "99 times remaining."

Next, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) or the variable pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) is started (FIG. 65-21 (5)), the second A cut-in image containing the ally character image 006IWC02 and the text "This presence!?" is displayed (Figure 65-21 (6)), and the first ally character image 006IWC01 and the text "Ahead..." are displayed. A cut-in image including the cut-in image is displayed in a superimposed manner (FIG. 65-21 (7)), and then an effect display in which the cut-in image disappears is performed (FIG. 65-21 (8)). Since the super reach (powerful RUSH) is started after this, the effects shown in FIGS. 65-21 (6) to (8) can be said to be effects that suggest that the super reach (powerful RUSH) will be executed.

Next, when the left and right ornamental symbols "2" enter the reach state (Fig. 65-22 (9)), and the middle ornamental symbols "1" and "2" are displayed (Fig. 65-22 (10)), A push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Press!" are displayed as an action promotion display (FIG. 65-22 (11)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-22 (11), after the movement promotion display prompting the player to move is displayed, when a press operation is performed (or when the movement promotion period ends), the variation pattern PB2-4 ( Super reach B) When super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on a jackpot, the jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65-22 (12). On the other hand, if the super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) being off, the missing symbol "212" is tentatively shown as shown in Figure 65-22 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 65-22 (14), the missed symbol "212" is stopped and displayed.

Here, a modification example in which the push button 31B is required to be repeatedly pressed in the super reach (powerful RUSH) will be described. FIG. 65-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example in which a continuous hitting operation is required in super reach (powerful RUSH). In the modified example shown in Figure 65-23, after the scene in Figure 65-21 (8), as shown in Figure 65-23 (15), the character display "FEVER" is displayed, and the character display "FEVER" is displayed. A light effect image is displayed superimposed on the screen, including the text ``Continuous Hit Challenge'' and ``Light Up FEVER.'' Next, along with the second ally character image 006IWC02, the push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Continuous Hit" are displayed as an action promotion display that prompts the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B. An effect display is performed in which the characters "" change to a glowing state (FIG. 65-23 (16)). In the scene shown in FIG. 65-23 (16), only the character "F" out of the character display "FEVER" has changed to illuminate.

Then, when Super Reach (Powerful RUSH) is executed based on the variable pattern PB2-4 (Super Reach B) jackpot, depending on the repeated hitting operation that satisfies the execution conditions (or the movement promotion period 65-23 (17)), all the characters of the character display "FEVER" change to a glowing manner, and the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy manner (FIG. 65-23 (17)). . On the other hand, if the super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on the variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B), all the characters in the character display "FEVER" will change depending on the end of the movement promotion period. An effect display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a disappointing manner while the second ally character image 006IWC02 is not illuminated (FIG. 65-23 (18)). Then, the losing symbol "212" is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-23 (19)), and then the losing symbol "212" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-23 (20)). In addition, in the modified example shown in Fig. 65-23 in which repeated pressing of the push button 31B is required in the super reach (powerful RUSH), after the scene in which all the decorative symbols shown in Fig. 65-21 (8) are displayed in a variable manner, , the screen transitions to a scene where the character display "Continuous Hit Challenge" etc. shown in Figure 65-23 (15) is displayed, but this is not limited to this configuration. After the scene in which all the decorative symbols shown in the figure are displayed in a fluctuating manner, a reach mode occurs where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned, and then the scene transitions to a scene where the character display "Multi-hit challenge" etc. shown in Figure 65-23 (15) is displayed. You may also do so. Further, in this case, the decorative pattern reduced during the continuous hit challenge may be displayed in a ready-to-reach mode.

When the jackpot notification shown in FIG. 65-22 (12) or FIG. 65-23 (17) is performed, a radial pattern background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body 32 displays the image from the initial position. A movable body performance is executed that moves to the performance position in front of the device 5 (FIG. 65-24 (21)). Next, the movable body 32 stops at the presentation position in front of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time (FIG. 65-24 (22)), and then the movable body 32 is controlled to return from the presentation position to the initial position (FIG. 65-24). 24(23)).

Next, the second mini-character image 006IWC05 is displayed at the lower left and lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, and the jackpot symbol "222" is displayed at the center of the display area (FIG. 65-24 (24)). , this jackpot symbol "222" is gradually enlarged and displayed (FIG. 65-24 (25)), and eventually enlarged and displayed so as to cover the entire display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-24 (26)). Thereafter, on the image display device 5, the normal size jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-24 (27)), and finally the jackpot symbol "222" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-24 (27)). 28)).

(Fanfare performance executed in high probability state)
Next, a fanfare performance performed in a high probability state will be explained. FIGS. 65-25 and 65-26 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of fanfare effects executed in a high probability state.

When a jackpot occurs in a high probability state, a fanfare effect is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 65-19 (21) or FIG. 65-24 (28). In the fanfare performance executed in a high probability state, first, a background image of a radial pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and the words "Right hit" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed at the upper right of the display area. . Then, the character display "Super" appears from the upper side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Fig. 65-25 (1)), and then an effect display is performed in which the character display "Super" moves to the center of the display area (Fig. 65-25 (1)). 65-25(2)).

Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the character display "powerful" is enlarged and a part thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display area (FIG. 65-26 (3)). Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the entire character display ``powerful'' is displayed within the display area (FIG. 65-26 (4)).

Next, a part of the character display "BONUS" appears from the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Figure 65-25 (5)), and then the character display "BONUS" moves to the center of the display area and the entire character display is displayed. An effect display is performed to fit within the area (FIG. 65-25 (6)).

Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the characters "Super", "Powerful", and "BONUS" are enlarged and a portion of each is displayed so as to protrude from the display area (Fig. 65-25 (7) ). Thereafter, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the characters ``SUPER'', ``POWERFUL'', and ``BONUS'' are displayed in their entirety so that they fit within the respective display areas (FIG. 65-25 (8)).

Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed to invert the color of the image being displayed (FIG. 65-26 (9)), and then the color of the image being displayed is inverted again (i.e., restored). An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-26 (10)).

Next, a part of an arrow image imitating a rightward arrow appears from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-26 (11)) and is superimposed on the character display "Super", "Powerful", and "BONUS". (ie, in a layer higher than the character display "Super", "Powerful", and "BONUS"), an effect display that moves toward the right side of the display area is performed (FIG. 65-26 (12)). The arrow image also has the words "Right-handed" superimposed on it.

Next, in the image display device 5, when the tip of the arrow image reaches the right edge of the display area (FIG. 65-26 (13)), an effect display moves toward the left side of the display area so as to hit the right edge of the display area and bounce back. is performed (Figure 65-26 (14)). After that, when the rear end of the arrow image reaches the left edge of the display area, a display that moves toward the right side of the display area is performed again (Figure 65-26 (15)), and the tip of the arrow image reaches the right edge of the display area. When the object reaches the right end of the display area, the effect display is repeated in which it hits the right end of the display area and moves toward the left side of the display area as if bouncing back (FIG. 65-26 (16)).

(Performance period)
Next, the performance period of each performance will be explained. FIG. 65-28 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period when a jackpot is achieved in super reach (battle). The scenes (25) to (37) shown in FIG. 65-28 correspond to the scenes shown in FIGS. 65-8 (25) to (31) and FIG. 65-9 (32) to (37), respectively. Note that the scene (26a) shown in FIG. 65-28 corresponds to the scene after FIG. 65-8 (26) and before FIG. 65-8 (27).

As shown in Figure 65-28, in the case of a jackpot in super reach (battle), the role object movement period during which the movable body effects shown in (25) to (26a) are performed is 1.7 seconds, and ( The presentation period for defeating the enemy character shown in 27) to (28) is 5 seconds, and the pattern display period in which the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in (29) to (37) is 3.8 seconds.

FIG. 65-29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period when a jackpot is achieved with super reach (powerful RUSH). The scenes (11) to (28) shown in FIG. 65-29 correspond to the scenes shown in FIGS. 65-22 (11) to (12) and FIG. 65-24 (21) to (28), respectively.

As shown in Figure 65-29, when the super reach (powerful RUSH) results in a jackpot, the movement promotion period shown in (11) is 3 seconds, and the jackpot symbols shown in (12) are aligned (notifying the jackpot). The period is 1 second, the accessory movement period shown in (21) to (23) is 2.2 seconds, and the symbol release period in which the jackpot symbols shown in (24) to (28) are stopped and displayed is 3.8 seconds. ing.

FIG. 65-30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each production period when a jackpot is achieved with super reach (patopato attack). The scenes (8) to (21) shown in FIG. 65-30 correspond to the scenes shown in FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and FIG. 65-19 (13) to (21), respectively. Note that FIG. 65-30 shows an example in which the push button 31B is not pressed during the operation promotion period.

As shown in Figure 65-30, when a super reach (Patopato Attack) results in a jackpot, the title notification period shown in (8) is 2 seconds, and the introduction period shown in (9) to (11) is 5 seconds. 5 seconds, the operation promotion period shown in (12) is 3 seconds, and the period in which the jackpot is announced (the police lamp image 006IWG01 is lit) shown in (13) to (21) is 7.5 seconds.

In this example, the period during which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting manner during super reach (pattop attack) is longer than the period during which the movable body 32 is operated during super reach (powerful RUSH). Specifically, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the police lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-30 is displayed in a lighting mode is longer than the period in which the accessory is activated (2.2 seconds) shown in FIG. 65-29. long. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the announcement impressive by ensuring a sufficient period for displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode.

In addition, in this example, the production period of Super Reach (Powerful RUSH) and the production period of Super Reach (Patopato Attack) are each an epilogue period (e.g., the blessing/lingering period from when the jackpot is announced to the player until the symbol is confirmed). (including the period during which the ending scene of the super reach performance is played). In the epilogue period of super reach (powerful RUSH), the movable body 32 is located at the initial position as shown in Figures 65-24 (24) to (28) and Figures 65-29 (24) to (28). , the combination "222" of the second mini-character 006IWC05 and the decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol is displayed. On the other hand, during the epilogue period of Super Reach (Patopato Attack), as shown in Figures 65-19 (17) to (21) and Figures 65-30 (17) to (21), the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode. In this state, a combination of decorative symbols "222" which becomes a jackpot symbol is displayed. With this configuration, the effects of the epilogue period are different between Super Reach (Powerful RUSH) and Super Reach (Patopato Attack), so that each can give an impression. In particular, during the epilogue period of Super Reach (Patopato Attack), the jackpot symbol is displayed while the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state, giving an impression of winning in Super Reach (Patopato Attack). can.

FIG. 65-31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of each production period in the case of a loss in each super reach. Figure 65-31 (A) is an example of losing in super reach (battle), and each scene (42) to (43) shown in Figure 65-31 (A) is similar to Figure 65-10 (42). ~(43) Each corresponds to the scene shown. Also, Figure 65-31 (B) is an example of a failure in super reach (powerful RUSH), and each of the scenes (18) to (20) shown in Figure 65-31 (B) is shown in Figure 65-23. (18) to (20) correspond to the situations shown respectively. Also, Figure 65-31 (C) is an example of a miss in super reach (pat-pat attack), and each of the scenes (22) to (24) shown in Figure 65-31 (C) is 20 (22) to (24) respectively correspond to the scenes shown.

As shown in FIG. 65-31(A), if the player loses in the super reach (battle), a 1.5-second loss notification is performed in each of the scenes (42) to (43). Further, as shown in FIG. 65-31(B), if the super reach (powerful RUSH) results in a loss, a loss notification for 3.5 seconds is performed in each of the scenes (18) to (20). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65-31(C), if the super reach (pat-pat attack) results in a loss, a 4-second loss notification is performed in each of the scenes (22) to (24).

Next, regarding Super Reach (Powerful RUSH), a presentation period corresponding to the timing at which a predetermined action is performed will be explained. FIG. 65-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a period in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner according to the timing at which a notification is made by pressing the push button 31B in a super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot.

FIG. 65-32 (A) shows that during the action promotion period for prompting the push button 31 to be pressed, shown in FIG. 65-22 (11), the push button 31 is pressed immediately (approximately 0 seconds later) after the start of the action promotion period. In this case, the production period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is approximately 7.4 seconds, and within that time, the temporary stop display of the jackpot symbol shown in Figure 65-24 (27) is The pattern shaking period to be performed is approximately 4 seconds.

Figure 65-32 (B) shows the case where the push button 31 is pressed approximately 1 second after the start of the movement promotion period during the movement promotion period shown in Figure 65-22 (11) to encourage the push button 31 to be pressed. This is an example. In this case, the production period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is approximately 6.4 seconds, and within that time, the symbol oscillation is performed to temporarily stop display the jackpot symbol shown in Figure 65-24 (27). The period will be approximately 3 seconds.

FIG. 65-32 (C) is an example in which the push button 31 is not pressed during the operation promotion period shown in FIGS. 65-22 (11) and 65-29 (11). In this case, the presentation period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed will be approximately 4.4 seconds, during which time the temporary jackpot symbol shown in Figure 65-24 (27) and Figure 65-29 (27) will be displayed. The symbol oscillation period during which the stop display is performed is about 1 second. In this way, in this example, the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, although the subsequent performance period differs depending on whether or not the push button 31 is pressed and, if the push button 31 is pressed, the timing. The performance period is adjusted by varying the symbol swing period. In other words, only the symbol fluctuation period changes in length, and the other performance periods always have the same length. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent performance control from becoming complicated.

FIG. 65-33 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a period in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner according to the timing at which notification is made by repeatedly pressing the push button 31B in a modified example of the super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot.

FIG. 65-33 (A) shows that during the action promotion period for prompting the repeated press operation of the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-22 (16), the repeated press operation satisfies the execution condition approximately 1 second after the start of the action promotion period. This is an example where an announcement is made (that is, a repeated tapping operation that satisfies the execution conditions) is made, and in this case, the presentation period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is approximately 7.4 seconds, Among these, the symbol shaking period during which the temporary stop display of the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 65-24 (27) is performed is approximately 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-33 (B) shows an example in which the notification is made approximately 4 seconds after the start of the action promotion period (i.e., This is an example in which a notification is made at the end of the movement promotion period without a repeated tapping operation that satisfies the execution conditions.In this case, the presentation period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is approximately 4.4 seconds. The symbol shaking period during which the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 65-24 (27) is temporarily stopped is approximately 1 second. In this way, in this example, the subsequent performance period differs depending on the timing of the announcement, but the performance period is adjusted by varying the symbol shaking period during which the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. In other words, only the symbol fluctuation period changes in length, and the other performance periods always have the same length. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent performance control from becoming complicated.

Next, regarding Super Reach (Patopato Attack), a presentation period corresponding to the timing at which a predetermined action is performed will be explained. FIG. 65-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance period according to the timing at which an announcement is made by pressing the push button 31B in a super reach (pattop attack) jackpot.

FIG. 65-34 (A) shows that during the action promotion period for prompting the push button 31 to be pressed, shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), the push button 31 is pressed immediately (approximately 0 seconds later) after the start of the action promotion period. In this case, the performance period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (during this period, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode is always displayed) is approximately 10.5 seconds, and The period in which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed is approximately 5 seconds.

Figure 65-34 (B) shows the case where the push button 31 is pressed approximately 1 second after the start of the movement promotion period during the movement promotion period shown in Figure 65-17 (12) to prompt the push button 31 to be pressed. This is an example, and in this case, the performance period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (during this period, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode is always displayed) is approximately 9.5 seconds, and within that period, the period shown in Fig. 65- The period in which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in 19(13) is displayed is approximately 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-34 (C) is an example in which the push button 31 is not pressed during the operation promotion period shown in FIGS. 65-17 (12) and 65-30 (12). In this case, the performance period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (during this period, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode is always displayed) is approximately 7.5 seconds, and within that time, the period shown in Figure 65-19 ( 13), the period in which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-30 (13) is displayed is approximately 2 seconds.

In this example, in the Super Reach (Patopato Attack) jackpot, if the player makes an action before the action promotion period ends, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state for the remaining period of the action promotion period. The period is designed to be extended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-34, if the pressing operation is performed immediately (approximately 0 seconds later) after the start of the operation promotion period, the period during which the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode is approximately If the button is pressed after about 1 second, it will be about 9.5 seconds, and if the 3-second movement promotion period has elapsed without pressing the button, it will be about 7.5 seconds. . With this configuration, the period in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state becomes longer, so that the player can be further immersed in the afterglow of the blessing, and can be motivated to actively perform the operation. In this example, only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed, although the subsequent performance period differs depending on whether or not the push button 31 is pressed and, if the push button 31 is pressed, the timing. The performance period is adjusted by making the period different. That is, the length is changed only during the period in which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed, and the other presentation periods always have the same length. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent performance control from becoming complicated.

FIG. 65-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance period according to the timing at which announcements are made by repeatedly pressing the push button 31B in a modified example of the super reach (pat-pat attack) jackpot.

FIG. 65-35 (A) shows that during the action promotion period for prompting the push button 31 to be pressed repeatedly as shown in FIG. This is an example of a case where an announcement is made after a continuous tapping operation that satisfies the execution conditions.In this case, the presentation period (during this period, the lighting mode is always The period in which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed is approximately 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-35(B) shows an example in which the notification is made approximately 4 seconds after the start of the action promotion period during the action promotion period for prompting the user to repeatedly press the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-18 (12'). In other words, the notification is given at the end of the movement promotion period without repeated hitting operations that satisfy the execution conditions). The period in which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed is approximately 1 second. In this way, in this example, the subsequent presentation period differs depending on the timing of the announcement, but the presentation period is adjusted by varying the period during which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed. That is, the length is changed only during the period in which only the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed, and the other presentation periods always have the same length. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent performance control from becoming complicated.

FIG. 65-36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance period of the fanfare performance executed in the low probability state. The scenes (1) to (21) shown in Figure 65-36 are as follows: Figures 65-11 (1) to (8), Figures 65-12 (9) to (16), and Figures 65-13 (17) to Each corresponds to the scene shown in (21). As shown in FIG. 65-36, the performance period of the fanfare performance executed in the low probability state is 14 seconds.

FIG. 65-37 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance period of the fanfare performance executed in the high probability state. The scenes (1) to (16) shown in FIG. 65-37 correspond to the scenes shown in FIGS. 65-25 (1) to (8) and FIG. 65-26 (9) to (16), respectively. As shown in FIG. 65-37, the performance period of the fanfare performance executed in the high probability state is 11 seconds.

In this example, the period during which the police lamp is displayed in a lighting manner is longer than the title notification period during which title notification is performed in the pre-announcement scene, and shorter than the fanfare period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-30, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state is longer than the title notification period (2 seconds) in which the title notification is performed. -37, it is shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to make the announcement stand out by ensuring a sufficient period during which the police lamp is displayed in a lit mode, and by making the fanfare period longer, it is possible to make the player aware of winning, and to make the player aware of winning. You can maintain your role appropriately.

Further, in this example, the period during which the police lamp is displayed in a lighting manner is longer than the action promotion period in the pre-announcement scene and shorter than the fanfare period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-30, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state is longer than the operation promotion period (3 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 65-37. is shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to make the announcement stand out by ensuring a sufficient period during which the police lamp is displayed in a lit mode, and by making the fanfare period longer, it is possible to make the player aware of winning, and to make the player aware of winning. You can maintain your role appropriately.

In this example, as shown in Figure 65-19, the patrol lamp is always displayed in a lit state from the time a predetermined operation is performed (or after the operation promotion period has elapsed) until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the system is not limited to such a configuration, and when a predetermined operation is performed (or when an operation promotion period has elapsed), a police lamp in a lighting mode is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and after that, the police lamp is not displayed. There may be a period (for example, only the jackpot symbols that are temporarily stopped are displayed). In this case as well, the period during which the police lamp is displayed in a lighting manner is longer than the title notification period and action promotion period in the pre-announcement scene and shorter than the fanfare period, so that the role of each period can be maintained appropriately. can.

Next, a modified example of the super reach (pat-pat attack) performance will be explained. FIG. 65-38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a modification in which a light condensing effect production is performed before the operation promotion period.

Figure 65-38 shows a scene in which an action promotion display including push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in Super Reach (Patopato Attack) (corresponding to Figure 65-17 (12) or Figure 65-18 (12')). ), an example is shown in which a light condensing effect effect is executed to display the previous stage of the push button image 006IWG02.

In the example of the first light focusing effect shown in Figure 65-38, the effect display transitions in the order of (11a'), (11b'), (11c'), and (12'), and is applied to a modification that requires repeated tapping operations. It is possible. The scene shown in FIG. 65-38 (12') in the first example of light focusing effect corresponds to FIG. 65-18 (12'), and the scene shown in FIGS. Each scene is inserted after FIG. 65-18 (11) and before FIG. 65-18 (12').

Specifically, when applying the first condensing effect to a modified example that requires repeated tapping operations, after the scene in FIG. 65-18 (11), as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11a'), The display area of the image display device 5 darkens (for example, the background changes to black), and an effect display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed. At this time, as shown in Figures 65-27 (1) to (4),

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11b'), a plurality of (three in this example) mini push button images 006IWG02a imitating the push button 31B are respectively superimposed on the second ally character image 006IWC02. An effect display is performed in which the objects are displayed in a light-emitting manner and start moving so as to gather in one place. Note that these push button images are displayed on a layer higher than the second ally character image 006IWC02, but since they are in a mode with high transparency, the second ally character image on the lower layer can be seen through the mini push button image 006IWG02a. Image 006IWC02 is now visible.

Next, the multiple mini-push button images 006IWG02a gradually reduce their movement speed, and as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11c'), the multiple mini-push button images 006IWG02a gather in one place, causing an effect image that shines strongly around them. An effect display is performed in which is displayed.

After that, when the plurality of mini-push button images 006IWG02a gradually reduce their moving speed and merge into one, the display area of the image display device 5 becomes bright again, as shown in FIG. 65-38 (12'), and the patrol lamp Along with the image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02, an effect display is performed in which the push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Continuous Hit" are displayed as an operation promotion display that prompts the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B. In addition, in the first light gathering effect production, the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 65-27 (1) to (4) during the period shown in FIGS. 65-38 (11a') to (12'). Although it is displayed in a manner that moves left and right, it is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the period shown in FIGS. 65-38 (11a') to (11c'), or During the period shown in '), the second ally character image 006IWC02 may be displayed in a stationary manner, and from the next scene, the second ally character image 006IWC02 may be displayed in a manner that moves left and right. . Furthermore, for example, the second ally character image 006IWC02 may be displayed in a stationary manner, similar to the second light condensing effect production described later.

In the example of the second light focusing effect shown in FIG. 65-38, the effect display changes in the order of (11a), (11b), (11c), and (12), and is applicable to an example in which a press operation is required. The scene in FIG. 65-38 (12) in the second example of light focusing effect corresponds to FIG. 65-17 (12), and each scene in FIG. 65-38 (11a) (11b) (11c) is It is inserted after FIG. 65-17 (11) and before FIG. 65-17 (12).

Specifically, when applying the second light focusing effect to an example where a press operation is required, after the scene in Figure 65-17 (11), the image display as shown in Figure 65-38 (11a) The display area of the device 5 darkens (for example, the background changes to black), and an effect display is performed in which the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a stationary state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11b), a plurality of (three in this example) mini-push buttons imitating the push button 31B are partially superimposed on the second ally character image 006IWC02 displayed in a stationary state. The button images 006IWG02a are each displayed in a light-emitting manner, and an effect display is performed in which the button images 006IWG02a start moving so as to gather in one place. Note that these mini-push button images 006IWG02a are displayed on a layer higher than the second ally character image 006IWC02, but since they are in a mode with high transparency, the mini-push button images 006IWG02a are displayed on the second layer of the lower layer. The ally character image 006IWC02 is visible.

Next, the multiple mini-push button images 006IWG02a gradually reduce their movement speed, and as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11c), the multiple mini-push button images 006IWG02a gather in one place, and a strong glowing effect image surrounds them. A presentation display is performed.

After that, when the plurality of mini-push button images 006IWG02a gradually reduce their moving speed and merge into one, the display area of the image display device 5 becomes bright again as shown in FIG. 65-38 (12), and the patrol lamp image Along with 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02, an effect display is performed in which the push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Press!" are displayed as an operation promotion display that urges the player to press the push button 31B.

In this example, during the periods (11a), (11b), (11c), and (12) when the second light condensing effect is performed, the second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a stationary state. Ru. In other words, the display preceding the push button image 006IWG02 (in this example, the plurality of mini push button images 006IWG02a) is displayed in a manner accompanied by movement, while the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 are in a static state. Is displayed. With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

Next, the presentation period when applying the light condensing effect presentation will be explained. FIG. 65-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production period of the light condensing effect production. Note that FIG. 65-39 shows an example where no pressing operation is performed.

As shown in Figure 65-39, when applying the light-gathering effect, the period during which the light-gathering effect is performed (for example, the period corresponding to Figures 65-38 (11a) to (11c)) is approximately 1 second. . If the pressing operation is not performed, the period during which the action promotion display is performed (for example, the period corresponding to Fig. 65-38 (12) and Fig. 65-17 (12)) is approximately 3 seconds; The performance period until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (during this period, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is always displayed) is approximately 7.5 seconds, and within that period, the police lamp image in the lighting mode shown in Figure 65-19 (13) is displayed. The period during which only the image 006IWG01 is displayed is approximately 2 seconds.

In this example, before the movement promotion is performed, multiple glowing mini push button images 006IWG02a are combined as shown in Figures 65-38 (11a') to (12') and (11a) to (12). It is possible to execute a light condensing effect production in which the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed. When executing the light-gathering effect, the period during which the police lamp is displayed in a lighting mode is longer than the sum of the period during which the light-gathering effect is being executed and the operation promotion period. It is configured. Specifically, the light concentration effect production period (0.1 + 0.3 + 0.6 = 1 second) shown in Figures 65-38 and 65-39 and the movement promotion period (3 seconds) shown in Figure 65-39 are combined. The period (7.5 seconds) during which the police lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-39 is displayed in a lighting mode is longer than the period (4 seconds) shown in FIG. With such a configuration, by ensuring a sufficient period for displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode, it is possible to make the announcement stand out and improve interest.

As described above, the feature section 006IW discloses the configuration of the gaming machine shown below.

(Means 1-1) The gaming machine disclosed in the present characteristic part 006IW is a gaming machine for playing games, and is equipped with display means (for example, image display device 5), and the display means has a pre-announcement scene (for example, During the production period corresponding to Figures 65-17 (8) to (12) and Figures 65-18 (8) to (12')), the announcement object (for example, police lamp image 006IWG01) is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, unlit). display mode (dark red mode; see left side of FIG. 65-15(B)), and display the character (for example, second ally character image 006IWC02) in the first display mode (for example, an expectant expression). (For example, see Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12').) If the lottery result is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in an announcement mode (for example, in a lighting mode (red). The character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode; see FIG. 65-19 (13) on the right side of FIG. ), (16)), and if the result of the lottery is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. It is displayed in a different third display mode (for example, a disappointing mode; see FIG. 65-20 (22)). With this configuration, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by indicating success or failure in the form of the notification object and supplementarily changing the display form of the character.

Further, this feature section 006IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1-2) to (means 1-5).

(Means 1-2) In Means 1-1, the size of the announcement object is better when displayed in an announcement mode, and when the lottery result is non-winning, it is displayed in a non-announcement mode after the pre-announcement scene. (For example, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode after the winning notification shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is larger than the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode after the loss notification shown in FIG. 65-40 (1). (The display size is larger than image 006IWG01), when the lottery result is non-winning, it is better to display it in a non-announcement mode after the pre-announcement scene than when it is displayed in a non-announcement mode in the pre-announcement scene. (For example, the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lit state after the missed announcement shown in Figure 65-40 (1) is larger than the pre-announcement scene shown in Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12') (The display size is larger than that of the police lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lit state). With such a configuration, by making the notification object appear larger when announcing the win, it is possible to appeal the win in a suitable manner. Furthermore, even in the non-announcement mode, when announcing non-winning, the non-winning can be made easier to recognize by making it appear larger than the pre-announcement scene.

(Means 1-3) In the means 1-1 or 1-2, if the lottery result is a win, the display means displays the announcement object in an announcement mode without displaying the character after the pre-announcement scene. Then, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode, the character is displayed in the second display mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode without displaying the character). , Then, as shown in FIGS. 65-19 (14) to (16), the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting manner, and the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy manner), and the lottery result is a non-winning. In this case, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode (for example, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lighting mode as shown in Figure 65-20 (22)). and displays the second ally character image 006IWC02 in a disappointing manner). With such a configuration, only the notification object of the notification mode is displayed without displaying the character when announcing the winning, so that the content of the notification can be made easier to understand.

(Means 1-4) In any of the means 1-1 to 1-3, if the result of the lottery is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the display means displays the character in the same facial expression as the pre-announcement scene. At the same time, the notification object is displayed in a notification mode (for example, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) and before the scene shown in FIG. 65-19 (14), the second ally character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a pre-announcement scene. ), then the character is displayed with a surprised expression, then the character is displayed with a happy expression, and then the character is displayed with the same expression as the second ally character (for example, the second ally character Image 006IWC02 is displayed in the order of a surprised expression (FIG. 65-19 (14)), a happy expression (FIG. 65-19 (15)), and a joyful action (FIG. 65-19 (16)). . With this configuration, the character's facial expression changes to the facial expression that the player wants the player to have, so it is possible to provide an environment in which the player can easily tune in and enjoy the game.

(Means 1-5) In any of the means 1-1 to 1-4, the background color of the display means is the first color (for example, a white-based color scheme) in the pre-announcement scene, and the lottery result is a winning In this case, after the pre-announcement scene, the color will be a different color from the first color (for example, a red-based color scheme), and if the result of the lottery is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the color will be the same as the first color. It will be a systematic color (for example, a white-based color scheme). With this configuration, winning and non-winning can be easily recognized from the change in background color.

Further, this feature section 006IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 2-1) to (means 2-4).

(Means 2-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, which includes a display means (for example, an image display device 5), and the display means includes a notification object and a character (for example, a police lamp image 006IWG01 and a second ally character image 006IWC02). can be displayed in the pre-announcement scene (for example, the presentation period corresponding to Figures 65-17 (8) to (12) and Figures 65-18 (8) to (12')), and in the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, a non-lit mode (dark red mode), see the left side of FIG. 65-15 (B)), and the character is displayed in a first display mode (for example, with an expectant expression) ( For example, see Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12')), if the lottery result is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is changed to an announcement mode (for example, a lighting mode (red glowing mode)). ).The character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode; see FIG. 65-19 (13) on the right side of FIG. 65-15(B)). , (16)), and if the lottery result is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a different manner from the first display mode and the second display mode. The notification object is displayed in a third display mode (for example, a disappointing mode; see FIG. 65-20 (22)), and in the pre-announcement scene, an action promotion display that urges the player to take action is displayed at a position where the notification object is visible. (For example, as shown in Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the text display of "Press!" or "Continuously press" are placed in a position that does not overlap with the police lamp image 006IWG01 ( or at least in a position where part of the police lamp image 006IWG01 is visible and overlaps), and if the result of the lottery is a win, if the player makes a movement during the movement promotion period in which the movement promotion display is displayed. , displays the notification object in a notification mode (for example, when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), or when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-18 (12') When the repeated tapping operation (specifically, the repeated tapping operation that satisfies the execution conditions) is performed, the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), and the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state). With this configuration, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by indicating success or failure in the form of the notification object and supplementarily changing the display form of the character. Furthermore, by displaying the action promotion display at a position where the notification object is visible, it is possible to draw attention to both the presence of the notification object and the action promotion display.

(Means 2-2) In means 2-1, the action promotion display includes an image promotion display imitating an object to perform an action, and a text promotion display (for example, Fig. 65-17 (12), Fig. 65 -18 (12'), the display means includes the push button image 006IWG02 and text displays such as "Press!" and "Continuously press"), and both the image promotion display and the text promotion display completely display the notification object. Display it so that it is not covered (for example, as shown in Figure 65-17 (12), Figure 65-18 (12'), and Figure 65-27, the push button image 006IWG02 and the words "Press!" and "Continuously press") The character display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the police lamp image 006IWG01 (or at least a position where a part of the police lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible state). With such a configuration, it is possible to always draw attention to the notification object.

(Means 2-3) In the means 2-1 or 2-2, the display means displays the image promotion display so that the action of the announcement object and the action of the character are not synchronized (for example, in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in such a way that the button part alternates between a state in which it is not sunk (Fig. 65-27 (1)) and a state in which it is sunk (Fig. 65-27 (2)). , the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 are displayed so as to repeatedly move to the right (Fig. 65-27 (1)) and left (Fig. 65-27 (2)), and are mutually behavior appears to be out of sync). With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

(Means 2-4) In any of the means 2-1 to 2-3, when displaying the image promotion display, the display means displays the announcement object and the character statically, and displays the image promotion display in a mode that involves movement. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 65-38 (11a) to (12), the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 are displayed in a static state, while the The mini push button image 006IWG02a is displayed in a manner accompanied by an action). With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

Further, this feature section 006IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 3-1) to (means 3-2).

(Means 3-1) A gaming machine for playing games, which includes a display means (for example, an image display device 5), and the display means displays pre-announcement scenes (for example, FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and During the production period corresponding to (8) to (12') in FIG. 65-18), the notification object (for example, the police lamp image 006IWG01) is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, a non-lighting mode (dark red mode). (B) (see left side)), and the character (for example, second ally character image 006IWC02) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, an expectant expression) (for example, FIG. 65-17 (12), 65-18 (12')), if the lottery result is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, lighting mode (red glowing mode). Figure 65-15 (B) right side, 65-19 (13)), the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode; see FIGS. 65-19 (15) and (16)), and If the result is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode (for example, a disappointing mode). .Refer to Figure 65-20 (22)), the title is announced in the pre-announcement scene (for example, the title is announced as shown in Figures 65-17 (8) and 65-18 (8)), and the title is announced. The notification period in which the object is displayed in the notification mode is longer than the title notification period in which the title notification is performed, and shorter than the fanfare period (for example, as shown in FIG. 65-30, the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode) The period (7.5 seconds) is longer than the title notification period (2 seconds) during which title notification is performed, and shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds) as shown in FIG. 65-37). With this configuration, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by indicating success or failure in the form of the notification object and supplementarily changing the display form of the character. In addition, by ensuring a sufficient period for the announcement object to be displayed in the announcement format, the announcement can stand out, and by making the fanfare period longer, it is possible to make the player aware of winning, and the role of each period can be optimized. can be kept.

(Means 3-2) In means 3-1, the title display displayed as the title notification includes an image corresponding to the notification object and a character display related to the notification object (for example, Fig. 65-17 (8), Fig. 65 As shown in -18 (8), the title display displayed as the title notification includes three effect images corresponding to the police lamp image 006IWG01 and the character display of "Patopato" related to the police lamp), and the title display related to the notification object. The character display is displayed with more emphasis than other character displays (for example, as shown in Figure 65-17 (8) and Figure 65-18 (8), the character display ``Patopato'' is displayed with more emphasis than the character display ``Push Chance''). ''. Also, for example, only the character display ``Patopato'' may be displayed with an effect or may be operated). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize the notification object.

Further, this feature section 006IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 4-1) to (means 4-3).

(Means 4-1) A gaming machine for playing games, which includes a display means (for example, an image display device 5), and the display means displays pre-announcement scenes (for example, FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and During the production period corresponding to (8) to (12') in FIG. 65-18), the notification object (for example, the police lamp image 006IWG01) is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, a non-lighting mode (dark red mode). (B) (see left side)), and the character (for example, second ally character image 006IWC02) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, an expectant expression) (for example, FIG. 65-17 (12), 65-18 (12')), if the lottery result is a win, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, lighting mode (red glowing mode). Figure 65-15 (B) right side, 65-19 (13)), the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode; see FIGS. 65-19 (15) and (16)), and If the result is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode (for example, a disappointing mode). (See Figure 65-20 (22)), and in the pre-announcement scene, action promotion is performed to prompt the player to take action (for example, as shown in Figures 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12')). , the display means displays the push button image 006IWG02 and the characters "Press!" and "Continuous Hit"), and when the result of the lottery is a win, the display means displays the button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "Press!" and "Continuous Hit". When an operation is performed, the notification object is displayed in a notification mode (for example, when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), or as shown in FIG. 65-18 (12') If the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed in this state (specifically, a repeated tap operation that satisfies the execution conditions), the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) and the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state.) , the notification period in which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode is longer than the action promotion period and shorter than the fanfare period (for example, the period in which the police lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode as shown in FIG. 65-30 (7 .5 seconds) is longer than the movement promotion period (3 seconds) and shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds) as shown in Figure 65-37. With this configuration, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by indicating success or failure in the form of the notification object and supplementarily changing the display form of the character. In addition, by ensuring a sufficient period for the announcement object to be displayed in the announcement format, the announcement can stand out, and by making the fanfare period longer, it is possible to make the player aware of winning, and the role of each period can be optimized. can be kept.

(Means 4-2) In means 4-1, an image promotion display imitating the object to perform the movement is displayed as movement promotion (for example, Fig. 65-17 (12), Fig. 65-18 (12'), Fig. 65-38 (12), (12'), the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed), and the first stage display of the image promotion display is executed before the action promotion is performed (for example, in FIG. 65 -38 As shown in (11a') to (12') and (11a) to (12), there is a light-concentration effect in which multiple glowing mini push button images 006IWG02a are combined to display push button image 006IWG02). The notification period is longer than the sum of the first stage performance period and the movement promotion period during which the first stage performance is executed (for example, the light condensing effect performance period shown in Figures 65-38 and 65-39). (0.1 + 0.3 + 0.6 = 1 second) and the movement promotion period (3 seconds) shown in Figure 65-39 (4 seconds), the police lamp image 006IWG01 shown in Figure 65-39 is turned on. The period displayed in (7.5 seconds) is longer). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the notification stand out by ensuring a sufficient period for displaying the notification object in the notification mode, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 4-3) In means 4-1 or 4-2, if the player makes a movement before the movement promotion period ends, the notification object is displayed in a notification mode for the remaining period of the movement promotion period. (For example, as shown in Figure 65-34, if the pressing operation is performed immediately (approximately 0 seconds) after the start of the operation promotion period, the police lamp image 006IWG01 will be displayed in a lit state. If the pressing operation is performed after approximately 1 second, the period will be approximately 9.5 seconds, and if the 3-second movement promotion period has elapsed without any pressing operation, the period will be approximately 10.5 seconds. 7.5 seconds). With such a configuration, the period during which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode becomes longer, so that the player can be further immersed in the afterglow of the blessing.

Further, this feature section 006IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 5-1) to (means 5-3).

(Means 5-1) A gaming machine for playing games, capable of executing a first performance that notifies a winner and a second performance, in which the first performance is an inciting scene and then moves a movable body. (For example, the super reach (powerful RUSH) performance when the powerful RUSH mode is selected as shown in Figure 65-21, Figure 65-22, Figure 65-23, and Figure 65-24). In the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, the character is displayed in the first display mode, and then the announcement object is displayed in the announcement mode without moving the movable body, and the character This is an effect that announces the winning by displaying in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, the PatoPato shown in Figures 65-16, 65-17, 65-18, and 65-19). The period during which the announcement object is displayed in the announcement mode in the super reach (patto-pat attack) performance when the attack mode is selected is longer than the period in which the movable object is operated in the first performance. (For example, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the police lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-30 is displayed in a lighting mode is longer than the period in which the accessory is activated (2.2 seconds) shown in FIG. 65-29.) . With such a configuration, the notification can make an impression by ensuring a sufficient period for displaying the notification object in the notification mode.

(Means 5-2) In means 5-1, identification information (for example, a special symbol) is displayed variably, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display, the player wins and the player wins. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for The performance period of the first performance and the performance period of the second performance are each an epilogue period (for example, a blessing/lingering period from when the jackpot is announced to the player until the symbol is confirmed, and the ending scene of the super reach performance is played. In the epilogue period of the first performance, the movable body is located at the retreat position, and the variable display result of the performance identification information corresponding to the character and the specific display result is displayed (for example, Fig. 65-24 (24)). ~ (28), as shown in Figures 65-29 (24) ~ (28), the movable body 32 is located at the initial position, and the combination "222" of the second mini-character 006IWC05 and the decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol is displayed. In the epilogue period of the second performance, the variable display result of the performance identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed with the notification object being displayed in the notification mode (for example, FIG. 65-19 (17 ) to (21), as shown in Figures 65-30 (17) to (21), while the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lit state, the decorative pattern combination "222" that becomes the jackpot pattern is displayed. ). With this configuration, the first performance and the second performance differ from each other in the performance of the epilogue period, so that each can give an impression. In particular, during the epilogue period of the second performance, variable display results of performance identification information corresponding to specific display results are displayed while the announcement object is displayed in a notification mode, giving an impression of winning in the second performance. be able to.

(Means 5-3) In the means 5-1 or 5-2, the first effect and the second effect are effects executed based on the same variation pattern (for example, the variation shown in FIG. 65-2). When pattern PA2-4 or variable pattern PB2-4 is determined, if the production mode is the powerful RUSH mode, the super reach (powerful RUSH) production is executed, and if the production mode is the patrol attack mode, the super reach (powerful RUSH) production is executed. When the first effect is executed based on one variation pattern, and when the second effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, from the start of variation. The period until the end of the variation is the same (for example, when a super reach (powerful RUSH) performance or a super reach (patopato attack) performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-4 as shown in Figure 65-2) are both 80 seconds, and when a super reach (powerful RUSH) performance or a super reach (patopato attack) performance is executed based on the variation pattern PB2-4, the duration is 100 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects based on the same variation pattern, and it is also possible to impress the user with the announcement using the announcement object.

Further, this feature section 006IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 6-1) to (means 6-2).

(Means 6-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, which includes a display means and a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R), and the display means has an announcement object and a character (for example, a police lamp image 006IWG01 and The second ally character image 006IWC02) can be displayed in the pre-announcement scene (for example, the production period corresponding to FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and FIGS. 65-18 (8) to (12')), In the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, a non-lit mode (dark red mode), see the left side of Figure 65-15(B)), and the character is displayed in a first display mode (for example, full of expectations). If the result of the lottery is a win, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, after the pre-announcement scene). The character is displayed in a second display mode (for example, a happy mode) that is different from the first display mode. 65-19 (15) and (16)), and if the lottery result is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in the non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in the first display mode and The notification object is displayed in a third display mode that is different from the second display mode (for example, a disappointing mode; see FIG. 65-20 (22)), and the sound output means is linked to displaying the notification object in the notification mode. A notification sound is output, and then the character's voice is output (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 65-19 (14) to (16), each character's voice such as ``ha'', ``yay'', and ``yay, yay'' is output in a tone corresponding to the character). With this configuration, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by indicating success or failure in the form of the notification object and supplementarily changing the display form of the character. Furthermore, by sequentially outputting the notification sound and the character's voice, the winning can be made more exciting.

(Means 6-2) In the means 6-1, when the result of the lottery is non-winning, the sound output means does not output the sound corresponding to displaying the notification object in a non-notification mode, and outputs the voice of the character. (For example, as shown in Figure 65-20 (22), the sound corresponding to displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a non-lit mode is not output, and the character voice with the tone corresponding to the character is ``Okay, do your best next time.'' -!'' is output), and if the result of the lottery is a win, the period in which the notification sound is output is longer than the period in which the character's voice is output (for example, as shown in Figure 65-19 (13), During the period when the notification sound is output in conjunction with displaying the police lamp image 006IWG01 in a lighting mode, the character's voice will be "hah", "yay", " (longer than the period in which each character's voice is output, "Yay, yay"), the period in which the character's voice is output when the lottery result is a win is longer than the period in which the character's voice is output when the lottery result is a non-winner. longer than the output period (for example, as shown in Figure 65-19 (14) to (16), each character says ``ha'', ``yay!'', ``yay, yay'' in the voice tone corresponding to the character when winning a jackpot. The period during which the voice is output is longer than the period during which the character voice saying "Good luck, do your best next time!" in the tone corresponding to the character when the character misses the match, as shown in FIG. 65-20 (22)). With such a configuration, it is possible to appeal the announcement by outputting the announcement sound, and it is possible to make winning more exciting, and it is also possible to make it possible to know the mode of the announcement object, that is, whether it is valid or not, depending on whether or not the announcement sound is output. In addition, if the player has not won, the announcement sound is not output, but the character's voice is output, thereby avoiding the situation where there is no sound and getting too excited, and reducing player disappointment. .

In addition, in the example shown in the feature part 006IW above, when using the expression "the result of the lottery is a win", it means that the display result of the special map game is a "jackpot", and it means that the result of the lottery is a non-win. It has been explained that when the expression "winning" is used, it means that the display result of the special drawing game is "losing", but this is not limited to this, and in means 1-1 to 6-2, The expression "the result of the lottery is a winning" means that in the variable display start setting process executed on the production control board 12 side, a lottery regarding production is performed, and a predetermined production (specifically, a police lamp image 006IWG01) is selected. It may also include the meaning that a decision has been made to execute a performance in which a jackpot is announced by lighting up. For example, the expression "the lottery result is non-winning" means that in the variable display start setting process executed on the performance control board 12 side, a lottery regarding the performance is performed, and a predetermined performance (specifically, It may also include the meaning that the decision to execute the production (in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is lit and a jackpot is announced) has not been made.

For example, the configuration shown in this feature section 006IW can be applied to slot machines in addition to pachinko machines, and when applied to slot machines, the expression "the lottery result is a win" can be used for AT lottery and winning combinations. The lottery may also mean that a bonus prize is won.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
Display means;
The display means is
In the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, the character is displayed in a first display mode,
When the specific display result is derived, after the pre-announcement scene, displaying the announcement object in an announcement mode and displaying the character in a second display mode different from the first display mode;
If the specific display result is not derived, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. death,
The game control means is
Performing variable display of the specific identification information based on multiple types of variable display patterns,
controllable into a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state;
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed in the corresponding display area,
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches a pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, a moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved, and a preliminary operation display in which the decorative identification information is operated in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display are performed. It is possible to
performing the preliminary operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
Performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means,
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images